bidder`s manual - Lord and Son Construction

Transcription

OKALOOSA ANIMAL CLINIC
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
BIDDER’S MANUAL
April 4, 2013
PROJECT #: 11004
BID DUE: April 30, 2013 @ 3:00 P.M.
9 Miracle Strip Pkwy, SW, Fort Walton Bch., FL 32548
850-664-2220 email: [email protected]
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
TOC-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
Section 00100 Bid Solicitation
1-1
Section 00200 Instructions to bidders
1-3
Section 00300 Bid Form
1-3
Section 00500 Agreement
1-1
Section 00700 General Conditions
1-1
Section 00800 Supplementary General Conditions
1-1
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01045 Cutting and Patching
Section 01100 Summary
Section 01210 Allowances
Section 01250 Contract Modification Procedures
Section 01290 Payment Procedures
Section 01310 Project Management Coordination
Section 01320 Construction Progress Documentation
Section 01330 Submittal Procedures
Section 01400 Quality Requirements
Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01600 Product Requirements
Section 01700 Execution Requirements
Section 01731 Cutting and Patching
Section 01770 Closeout Procedures
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-2
1-3
1-3
1-3
1-8
1-5
1-6
1-3
1-6
DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION
Section 02080 Piped Utilities – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02221 Building Demolition – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02230 Site Clearing – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02300 Earthwork – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02361 Termite Control
Section 02510 Water Distribution – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02530 Sanitary Sewage – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02553 Natural Gas Distribution – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02630 Storm Drainage – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02741 Hot-mix Asphalt Paving – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02751 Cement Concrete Pavement – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02810 Irrigation System – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02920 Lawns and Grasses – See Site Improvement Plans
Section 02930 Exterior Plants – See Site Improvement Plans
1-4
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Section 03300 Cast-In-Place-Concrete – (See Sheet 7 of Site Improvement Plans and Sheet S-001 of
Drawings).
Section 03301 Insulating Concrete Forming
1-6
Section 03520 Lightweight Concrete Roof Insulation
1-4
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
Section 04720 Cast Stone
Section 04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies
TABLE OF CONTENTS
STOKES ARCHITECTURAL, INC.
1-4
1-8
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
TOC-2
DIVISION 5 – METALS
Section 05120 Structural Steel – See Sheet S-001 of Drawings
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications
Section 05521 Pipe and Tube Railings
1-2
1-4
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
Section 06100 Rough Carpentry
Section 06176 Metal Plate-Connected Wood Trusses - See Sheet S-001 of Drawings
Section 06200 Finish Carpentry
1-5
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07115 Bituminous Dampproofing
Section 07185 Pedestrian Traffic Coating-Waterproof Membrane
Section 07212 Batt Insulation
Section 07218 Polyicynene Spray Insulation
Section 07323 Stone Coated Metal Modular Roof Panels
Section 07464 Vinyl Soffits
Section 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
Section 07710 Manufactured Roof Specialties
Section 07720 Roof Accessories
Section 07841 Through-Penetration Firestop Systems
Section 07900 Joint Sealants
1-5
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-2
1-3
1-9
1-9
1-4
1-4
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors
Section 08410 Metal-Framed Storefronts
Section 08531 Vinyl Windows
Section 08800 Glazing
1-4
1-5
1-4
1-4
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09260 Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Section 09651 Resilient Flooring Tile
Section 09772 Fiberglass Reinforced Wall Panels
Section 09910 Painting
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-9
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section 10441 Signs
Section 10801 Toilet and Bath Accessories
1-5
1-2
DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL
Section 15100- Heating, Ventilating and Airconditioning
Section 15400- Plumbing
1-24
1-14
DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL
Section 16000 Electrical General Requirements
Section 16050 Basic Electrical Material and Methods
Section 16100 Wiring Methods
Section 16200 Electric Power and Distribution
Section 16231 Packaged Engine Generator
Section 16289 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression System
Section 16500 Lighting
1-5
1-5
1-9
1-4
1-21
1-5
1-6
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00100-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 00100
BID SOLICITATION
FROM:
1.01 THE OWNER (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO AS OWNER):
A.
Elizabeth L. Conrad DVM
B.
411 West Highway 90
C.
Crestview, Florida 32536
1.02 AND THE ARCHITECT (HEREINAFTER REFERRED TO AS ARCHITECT):
A.
Stokes Architectural, Inc.
B.
9 Miracle Strip Parkway, S.W.
C.
Fort Walton Beach, Florida 32548
1.03 TO: POTENTIAL BIDDERS
A.
Your firm is invited to submit an offer under seal to Owner for construction of a facility located
at the above address before 3:00 pm local standard time on the 30 day of April, 2013, for the
following project: Okaloosa Animal Clinic
B.
The Scope of Work to be performed under this contract includes, but is not limited to, concrete
footings and concrete slab, roof trusses, wood framing, ICF, plywood roof deck, metal shingles
roofing, brick veneer, plaster, vinyl soffit & fascia, vinyl windows, exterior doors, interior doors,
hardware, gypsum wallboard, cabinetry, casework, carpeting, flooring, painting, insulation,
electrical work, mechanical units, appliances, and finishing of interior and exterior construction
C.
A cd containing copies of all contract documents, in pdf format, is available for each prime
general contractor. This disc is free of charge and may be picked up during regular business
hours at the offices of Stokes Architectural, Inc. located at 9 Miracle Strip Parkway SW, Fort
Walton Beach, Fl. 32548. Documents may also be obtained from Blueprints Now located at
1130 Hospital Drive, Fort Walton Beach, Florida 32547. It is the prime general contractor’s
responsibility for all printing and plan distribution to subcontractors.
D.
A Mandatory Pre-Bid Conference is scheduled for 3:00 p.m. (local time) on April 23, 2013, to
clarify and resolve any questions or concerns, and shall be held at the Architects office.
E.
Bidders will be required to provide Bid security in the form of a Bid Bond of a sum no less than
5 percent of the Bid Amount.
F.
Refer to other bidding requirements described in Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders.
G.
Submit your offer on the Bid Form provided.
H.
Your offer will be required to be submitted under a condition of irrevocability for a period of 30
days after submission.
I.
The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
END OF BID SOLICITATION
BID SOLICITATION
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00200-1
SECTION 00200
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INVITATION
1.01 BID SUBMISSION
A.
Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the Architect
before 3:00 pm local time on the 30 day of April, 2013. The Bid submission date is also herein
referred to as Bid closing date.
B.
Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.
C.
Within 7 days after receiving Bids and, subject to Acceptance of Bid by Owner, the Architect on
behalf of Owner will issue to the successful bidder a written Bid Acceptance.
D.
Amendments to the submitted offer will be permitted if received in writing prior to Bid
Acceptance and if endorsed by the same party or parties who signed and sealed the Bid offer.
1.02 INTENT
A.
The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform construction of a brick veneered
building and on-site improvements located at the project site for a Stipulated Sum contract, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.03 CONTRACT TIME
A.
Identify Contract Time in the Bid Form. The completion date in the Agreement shall be the
Contract Time added to the commencement date.
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
2.01 DEFINITIONS
A.
Bid Documents: Bid Solicitation, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, Bid Bond.
B.
Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
C.
Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal.
D.
Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form.
2.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION
A.
The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 11004, as prepared by Architect, and
with contents as identified in the Table of Contents.
2.03 AVAILABILITY
A.
Bid Documents may be obtained at the office of Architect per the Bid Solicitation.
B.
Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their
use does not grant a license for other purposes.
2.04 EXAMINATION
A.
Upon receipt of Bid Documents verify that documents are complete. Notify Architect should the
documents be incomplete.
B.
Immediately notify Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.
2.05 INQUIRIES/ADDENDA
A.
Direct questions to Chris Goodpastor at the Architect’s office.
B.
Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00200-2
Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount.
C.
Verbal answers are not binding on any party.
D.
Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing Thursday, April 18, 2013. The reply
will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to known holders of the
Contract Documents.
3.01 SITE EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the project site before submitting a bid.
3.02 PRE-BID CONFERENCE
A.
A MANDATORY pre-bid conference will be held at the Architect’s office on Tuesday, April 23,
2013, at 3:00 pm local time.
QUALIFICATIONS
4.01 EVIDENCE OF QUALIFICATIONS
A.
To demonstrate qualification for performing the Work of this Contract, bidders may be requested
to submit written evidence of financial position, license to perform work in the State and City.
BID SUBMISSION
5.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE
A.
Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time
prescribed.
B.
Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed and sealed with the
required security in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project
name and Owner's name on the outside.
5.02 BID INELIGIBILITY
A.
Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain
arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the
Owner, be declared unacceptable.
B.
Bid Forms, Appendices, and enclosures which are improperly prepared may, at the discretion of
Owner, be declared unacceptable.
C.
Failure to provide security deposit, bonding or insurance requirements may, at the discretion of
Owner, be waived.
BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS
6.01 SECURITY DEPOSIT
A.
Bids shall be accompanied by a security deposit in the form of a Bid Bond in the amount of five
percent (5%) of the bid amount.
B.
The security deposit will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance
and Payment Bond(s) by the accepted bidder.
6.02 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE
A.
Accepted Bidder: Be prepared to provide a Performance and Payment bond as described in
Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions. If one is required by Owner, Owner will pay the
cost of the bonds.
6.03 INSURANCE
A.
Provide an executed "Undertaking of Insurance" on the form provided stating their intention to
provide insurance to the bidder in accordance with the insurance requirements of the Contract
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00200-3
Documents.
6.04 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices.
6.05 FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
Include in the Bid Form, the overhead and profit fees on own Work and Work by subcontractors,
applicable for Changes in the Work, whether additions to or deductions from the Work on which
the Bid Amount is based.
6.06 BID FORM SIGNATURE
A.
The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows:
1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also
sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature.
2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign.
Insert the word "Partner" under each signature.
3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures.
Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the
corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of the
company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law
resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with
the Bid Form in the bid envelope.
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION
7.01 DURATION OF OFFER
A.
Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of thirty (30) days
after the bid closing date.
7.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER
A.
Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
B.
After acceptance by Owner, Architect on behalf of Owner, will issue to the successful bidder, a
written Bid Acceptance.
END OF SECTION
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-1
SECTION 00300
BID FORM
DATE:
________________
BIDDERS NAME:
__________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
PHONE #
__________________________
EMAIL:
__________________________
TO:
ELIZABETH L. CONRAD, DVM
ARCHITECT:
9 MIRACLE STRIP PARKWAY SW
FORT WALTON BEACH, FLORIDA 32548
Gentlemen:
The bidder, in response to your BID SOLITATION for "OKALOOSA ANIMAL CLINIC, CRESTVIEW,
FLORIDA", and having carefully examined the Project Drawings, the Project Manual and the site of the
proposed work, and being familiar with conditions existing including the availability of materials proposed
to furnish all labor, materials and equipment to construct the project in accordance with the Contract
Documents, and the time indicated, at the price stated below. These prices shall cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required by the Contract Documents.
Drawings dated are as listed in the Index of Drawings on Sheet G-100 of the Drawings.
Specifications dated are as listed in the Index of Specifications at the front of the Project Manual.
Also examined were the Contract provisions, the Site Work and the conditions affecting the Work and
Addenda including,
Addendum No.
1
Dated:
April 5, 2013
Addendum No. __________
Dated:
_________________________
Addendum No. __________
Dated:
_________________________
BID FORM
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-2
In submitting this bid I/We agree:
1. To hold this bid open for thirty (30) days after the bid date.
2. To accept the provisions of the Standard Contract documents of the Owner regarding disposition of
bid security.
3. To enter into and execute a contract, if awarded, on the basis of this bid and to furnish Bonds in accordance with Specification Section 00500, and the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-2007.
4. To accomplish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5. The Undersigned hereby affirms and states that, upon award of Contract for said Work, I / We shall
commence work within ten (10) days after receiving Notice to Proceed and will proceed to the Completion within ________________________ (
) consecutive calendar days. Contractor is not responsible for delays due to acts of God.
6. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE: The Undersigned hereby agrees that if awarded the
Contract, a Bar Chart Schedule shall be submitted within fifteen (15)
consecutive calendar days
following notification of Contract award, and updated with each request for payment.
7. LISTING OF SUBCONTRACTORS: The Undersigned hereby states, That he/they will employ reputable and experienced subcontractors for the separate portions of Work. Only one (1) subcontractor
may be listed per trade.
PORTIONS OF WORK
SUBCONTRACTORS
DIVISION 2 – SITEWORK
Earthwork
_______________________________________________
Excavation and Backfill
_______________________________________________
Selective Demolition
_______________________________________________
Storm Drainage
_______________________________________________
Concrete for Site Work
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Formwork & Reinforcing
_______________________________________________
Concrete Placement
_______________________________________________
Insulating Concrete Forms
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
Unit Masonry Assemblies
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 6 – WOOD
Rough / Trim Carpentry
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 7 – THERMAL & MOISTURE
Metal Roofing System
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 15/21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
Fire Protection System
_______________________________________________
BID FORM
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-3
DIVISION 15/22 – PLUMBING
Plumbing Systems
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 15/23 – MECHANICAL
Heating Ventilation & A/C
_______________________________________________
DIVISION 16/26 – ELECTRICAL
Electrical
______________________________________________
Communication Systems
_______________________________________________
8. FEES FOR CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT: A fee of ______ percent (_____%) for overhead and a
fee of ______ percent (_____%) for profit on Contractor’s own Work and Work by Subcontractors
shall be applied for changes in the Work, whether additions to or deductions from the Work on which
the Bid Amount is based.
9. AWARDING THE CONTRACT: I / We understand that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or
all bids and to waive any irregularities in the bidding.
LUMP SUM BASE BID: I/We shall furnish all labor, materials and perform all work necessary for the
completion of the project as shown and specified in strict accordance with the above-named Contract
Documents for General Construction for the
LUMP SUM OF:____________________________________________DOLLARS ( $_______________)
.(Amounts shall be shown in both words and numerals. Amount in words will govern.)
Upon receipt of written notice of the acceptance of this bid Bidder will execute the formal contract within
ten (10) days and deliver a Surety Bond or Bonds if required by Owner.
I have attached the required bid security and subcontractor listing to this bid.
COMPANY: __________________________________________________________________
DATE:
____________________
BY:
_________________________________________
TITLE:
_________________________________________
(SEAL - IF BID IS BY A CORPORATION)
END OF SECTION 00300
BID FORM
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00500-1
SECTION 00500
AGREEMENT
FORM OF AGREEMENT
1.01 AIA DOCUMENT A101, OWNER-CONTRACTOR AGREEMENT FORM - STIPULATED SUM
2007 EDITION, FORMS THE BASIS OF CONTRACT BETWEEN THE OWNER AND
CONTRACTOR.
AMENDMENTS TO AGREEMENT FORM
2.01 TO BE INSERTED IN THE FOLLOWING SUBPARAGRAPHS:
A.
5.1.6.1 and 5.1.6.2: Ten Percent (10%).
END OF AGREEMENT
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00700-1
SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.01 AIA DOCUMENT A201, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION,
2007 EDITION, IS THE GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION
BETWEEN THE OWNER AND CONTRACTOR.
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
2.01 REFER TO DOCUMENT 00800 FOR AMENDMENTS TO THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS.
END OF DOCUMENT 00700
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00800-1
SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
INTENT
1.01 THESE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS AMEND AND SUPPLEMENT THE GENERAL
CONDITIONS DEFINED IN DOCUMENT 00700 AND OTHER PROVISIONS OF THE CONTRACT
DOCUMENTS AS INDICATED BELOW. ALL PROVISIONS WHICH ARE NOT SO AMENDED
OR SUPPLEMENTED REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT.
1.02 THE TERMS USED IN THESE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS WHICH ARE DEFINED IN THE
GENERAL CONDITIONS HAVE THE MEANINGS ASSIGNED TO THEM IN THE GENERAL
CONDITIONS.
MODIFICATIONS TO AIA A201
2.01 ARTICLE 7.3 - CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
A.
Add the following subparagraph:
1. 7.3.10: The Agreement identifies the overhead and profit fees applicable for Changes in
the Work, whether additions to or deductions from the Work on which the Contract Sum is
based and identifies the fees for subcontract work for changes (both additions and
deductions) in the Work. The Contractor shall apply fees as stipulated to his own and to
the Subcontractor's material and labor costs.
2.04 ARTICLE 11.5 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
A.
Add the following subparagraphs:
1. 11.5.3: Cost of bonds shall not be included in Bid Amount. If Owner requires Contractor
to furnish bonds, Owner will reimburse Contractor the cost of the Performance and
Payment Bonds.
2. 11.5.4: The bond value requirements are as follows:
a. Provide a 100 percent Performance Bond on AIA A312.
b. Provide a 100 percent Payment Bond on AIA A311.
c. Deliver bonds within 3 days after execution of the Contract.
END OF DOCUMENT 00800
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01045-1
SECTION 01045
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01
SUMMARY
A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
B. Refer to other sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching
individual parts of the work.
1.
Requirements in this Section also apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to
Divisions 15/23 and 16/26 for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and
patching mechanical and electrical installations.
C. Demolition of selected portions of the existing building, if any, are included in Section 02222 – Selective Demolition.
1.02
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching
will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.03
Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
Utilities: List any utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect and indicate how long service will be disrupted.
Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying
capacity or load-deflection ratio.
1.
Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting any of the following
structural elements;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Foundation Construction
Bearing and Retaining Walls
Structural Concrete
Structural Steel
Structural Decking
Equipment Supports
Piping, Ductwork, and / or Equipment
B. Do not cut and patch any operating elements and / or safety related components in a manner that
would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased
maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
01045-2
Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting any of the following
operating elements or safety related systems;
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Shoring, Bracing, and Sheeting
Primary operational system and equipment
Water, moisture or vapor barriers
Membranes and flashings
Fire Protection systems
Control systems
Communication systems
Electrical wiring systems
C. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that
would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace
construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
A. Use materials identical to the existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01
INSPECTION
A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and the conditions under which cutting and patching will be performed. Take corrective action before proceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.
3.02
PREPARATION
A. Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B. Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
C. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed
during cutting and patching operations.
D. Avoid interference of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.
3.03
PERFORMANCE
A. Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the
earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of
other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original
condition.
B. Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations,
including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01045-3
1.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering
and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.
To avoid marring existing finish surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into
the concealed surfaces.
3.
Cut through existing concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as carborundum
saw or a diamond-core drill.
4.
Comply with the requirements in applicable sections of Division 2 Sections where cutting
and patching requires excavating and backfilling operations.
C. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.
Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of
installation.
2.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained
adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
D. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access.
Remove excess paint, mortar, oils, putty and other items of similar nature.
01100-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01100
SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Okaloosa Animal Clinic
1.
2.
Project Location: 413 West Highway 90, Crestview, Florida.
Owner: Elizabeth L. Conrad, 411 West Highway 90, Crestview, Florida.
B.
Architect Identification: The Contract Documents were prepared by Stokes Architectural, Inc.,
9 Miracle Strip Parkway, Fort Walton Beach, Florida.
C.
Site Engineer Identification: Choctaw Engineering, Inc., 112 Truxton Ave., Fowrt Walton Beach,
FL.
D.
The Work consists of site work and construction of a basically single story building with access
to a finished partial attic space. Exterior walls are insulated concrete system with brick veneer.
Interior partitions are wood frame with gypsum board finish. Roof construction is metal shingles
on plywood decking on pre-engineered wood trusses
1.3
CONTRACT
A.
1.4
Project will be constructed under a general construction contract..
USE OF PREMISES
A.
1.5
General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A.
Separate Contract: Owner will award separate contracts for performance of certain construction
operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under
this Contract. These contracts will include the following:
1.
Epoxy Flooring: A separate contract will be awarded to <Insert name of separate
contractor> for installation of epoxy flooring and base in all areas as scheduled.
SUMMARY
STOKES ARCHITECTURAL, INC
01100-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.
B.
1.6
Cabinet Work: A separate contract will be awarded to <Insert name of separate
contractor> for furnishing and installation of base and wall cabinets in areas as shown.
Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out
smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE
A.
General: Owner has negotiated Purchase Orders with suppliers of material and equipment to
be incorporated into the Work. Owner has assigned these Purchase Orders to Contractor.
Costs for receiving, handling, storage if required, and installation of material and equipment are
included in the Contract Sum.
1.
2.
1.7
Contractor's responsibilities are the same as if Contractor had negotiated Purchase
Orders, including responsibility to renegotiate purchase and to execute final PurchaseOrder agreements.
The Schedule of Products Ordered in Advance is included at the end of this Section.
OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS
A.
Owner will furnish items as scheduled specific to the veterinary practice. The Work includes
providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and plumbing, mechanical, and
electrical connections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.8
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be
present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at
Project site.
Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS
A.
Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the
16-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.
SUMMARY
01100-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
B.
Section Identification: The Specifications use section numbers and titles to help crossreferencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric
sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete. Consult the table of contents at the
beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the
Contract Documents.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and
the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.
These conventions are as follows:
1.
2.
Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract
Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.
Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words
shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where
applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.
Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.
Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for
clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by
others when so noted.
a.
The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are
implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
SUMMARY
01210-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01210
ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
1.
B.
Types of allowances include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.
3.
1.4
Lump-sum allowances.
Unit-cost allowances.
Contingency allowances.
Testing and inspecting allowances.
Quantity allowances.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Certain materials and equipment are specified in the Contract Documents by allowances.
In some cases, these allowances include installation. Allowances have been established
in lieu of additional requirements and to defer selection of actual materials and equipment
to a later date when additional information is available for evaluation. If necessary,
additional requirements will be issued by Change Order.
Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and
handling Change Orders.
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for procedures for using unit prices.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for procedures governing the use of
allowances for testing and inspecting.
SELECTION AND PURCHASE
A.
At the earliest practical date after award of the Contract, advise Architect of the date when final
selection and purchase of each product or system described by an allowance must be
completed to avoid delaying the Work.
B.
At Architect's request, obtain proposals for each allowance for use in making final selections.
Include recommendations that are relevant to performing the Work.
C.
Purchase products and systems selected by Architect from the designated supplier.
SUBMITTALS
ALLOWANCES
01210-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
A.
Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form
specified for Change Orders.
B.
Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for
use in fulfillment of each allowance.
1.5
CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A.
Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by
Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B.
Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner
under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract
Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, taxes, insurance, equipment rental, and similar
costs.
C.
Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and overhead and profit margins as submitted in Paragraph 8 of the
Bid Form.
D.
At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by
Change Order.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return
damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance No. 1: Brick. Include face brick as specified in Division 4-Masonry, Section 04810Unit Masonry assemblies. Allow an amount of Five Hundred Dollars per thousand ($500/M).
B.
Allowance No. 2: Carpet, including installation. Allow an amount of Twenty-five Dollars per
square yard ($25/syd).
C.
Allowance No. 3: Hardware. Allow for door hardware an amount of Seven Thousand Five
Hundred Dollars ($7,500).
ALLOWANCES
01210-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
D.
Allowance No. 4: Contingency. Allow Thirty Thousand Dollars ($30,000) as defined in 1.5
above.
ALLOWANCES
01250-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01250
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements for handling and processing
allowances.
Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements for using unit prices.
Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions”.
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a
quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time
necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
01250-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the
Architect.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
C.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.
D.
Proposal Request Form: For Change Order proposals, use forms provided by Owner. Sample
copies are included at end of this Section.
1.5
ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on
the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement of
work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses, tolerances,
mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the
allowance.
If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders
related to unit-cost allowances.
Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent
quantity survey, measure, or count.
Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance
described in the Contract Documents, whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's
handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit. Submit claims within 21 days of receipt of the
Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject
claims submitted later than 21 days after such authorization.
1.
2.
Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost
amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from
what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents.
No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lowerpriced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated.
01250-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.6
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
01290-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01290
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
B.
1.
2.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for procedural requirements governing handling and
processing of allowances.
Division 1 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for
handling changes to the Contract.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's
Applications for Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination:
Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
2.
B.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
Submittals Schedule.
Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than
seven (7) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
Project name and location.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Name of Architect.
Architect's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value.
1)
3.
4.
5.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a.
6.
7.
8.
1.5
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.
Include
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
9.
Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Execute by a person authorized to sign
legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without
action.
1.
2.
E.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a
method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar
attachments if required.
1.
F.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested, before deduction for
retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with Contractor's waiver of
mechanic's lien for construction period covered by the application.
a.
5.
G.
Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every
entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is
lawfully entitled to a lien.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
01290-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
H.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
I.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of the Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01310 - 1
SECTION 01310
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
General project coordination procedures.
Coordination Drawings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general
installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and
control points.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination:
Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
B.
Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other
contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections,
which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.4
01310 - 2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings:
Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.
1.
2.
B.
Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers,
including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
1.
1.5
Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
Indicate required installation sequences.
Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
01320-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01320
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
1.3
Preliminary Construction Schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Material location reports.
Field condition reports.
Special reports.
1.
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.
2.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing
meeting and conference minutes.
3.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.
4.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and
inspections.
5.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic negatives as
Project Record Documents at Project closeout.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be
started.
B.
Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that
establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
C.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
D.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
1.4
01320-2
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the following activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals Schedule: Submit three (3) copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in
a tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
Contractor's Construction Schedule:
1.
Submit an electronic copy of schedule.
C.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
D.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.2
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
01320-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
A.
Procedures:
Scheduling."
B.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final
Completion.
2.3
Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
REPORTS
A.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials
delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously
reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery
dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.
B.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information.
Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
2.4
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities.
B.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in temporary field office.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
01330-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination
Drawings.
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties, Project Record
Documents and operation and maintenance manuals.
A.
General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
B.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
a.
C.
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination
with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
1.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for
coordination.
01330-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.
Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants,
Owner, or other parties is required, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.
3.
Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals
may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of
transmittal to Architect.
D.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on
submittals.
E.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect
observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve
as final submittal.
1.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
F.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from
sources other than Contractor.
G.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
H.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in
connection with construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
1.
2.
Number of Copies: Submit three copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project
Record Document.
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise
indicated:
a.
b.
B.
Initial Submittal: Submit a preliminary single copy of each submittal where
selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required.
Architect will return submittal with options selected.
Final Submittal: Submit three copies, unless copies are required for operation and
maintenance manuals.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
01330-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
D.
Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management
and Coordination."
E.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
1.
Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.
2.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
F.
Application for Payment:
Procedures."
Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment
G.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note
corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken.
C.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.
01400-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01400
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
C.
1.
1.3
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also
cover production of standard products..
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
01400-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.5
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Contractor Responsibilities:
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
3.
Provide quality-control services specified and required by
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
B.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established
by the Contract Documents.
C.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
01400-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-1
.
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Sewers and drainage.
Water service and distribution.
Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
Heating and cooling facilities.
Ventilation.
Electric power service.
Lighting.
Telephone service.
Temporary roads and paving.
Project identification and temporary signs.
Waste disposal facilities.
Field offices.
Storage and fabrication sheds.
Lifts and hoists.
Temporary stairs.
Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Environmental protection.
Stormwater control.
Pest control.
Site enclosure fence.
Security enclosure and lockup.
Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Temporary enclosures.
Temporary partitions.
Fire protection.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-2
.
E.
1.3
1.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of
implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
2.
Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.
3.
Division 2 Section "Termite Control" for pest control.
4.
Divisions 2 through 16 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for
products in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Owner's construction forces.
Architect.
Testing agencies.
Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage, by all parties engaged in
construction, at Project site.
C.
Water Service: Pay water service use charges, whether metered or otherwise, for water used
by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
D.
Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges, whether metered or otherwise,
for electricity used by all entities engaged in construction activities at Project site.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
B.
Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and
termination of each temporary utility.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1.
Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary
utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-3
.
2.
B.
1.7
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.
1.
B.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall
assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of
previously assigned responsibilities.
Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1.
2.
Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
1.
Field Offices: Prefabricated, Mobile unit or Job-built construction at Contractor’s option
with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air
conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading. .
B.
Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size
required by location and class of fire exposure.
C.
Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or
combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar
nonabsorbent material.
D.
Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser including paper cup supply.
E.
Heating Equipment: Provide self-contained heaters.
1.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-4
.
F.
Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset
button, and pilot light.
G.
Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for
surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be
nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use
of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service. Comply with
utility company recommendations.
1.
Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
2.
Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose.
B.
Water Service: Install water service as shown and specified in Site Improvement Plans.
1.
2.
C.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets and wash facilities. Comply with regulations and
health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of facilities.
1.
D.
Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar
disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste
containers for disposal of used material.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1.
Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F in permanently enclosed portions of
building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F for finishing activities and areas
where finished Work has been installed.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-5
.
E.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation
requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F.
Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution
system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period.
Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault
interrupters, and main distribution switchgear.
1.
G.
Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and
equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.
Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic
areas.
Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot extension cord can reach each area for
power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each
outlet.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
1.
I.
Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to
damage.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for
common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities.
1.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.3
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-6
.
1.
2.
Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction
and support facilities for easy access.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads adequate to
support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period.
C.
Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in
sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to
Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs.
Comply with details indicated.
Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and
visitors.
Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in
sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated
wood or steel.
Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over
exterior primer.
D.
Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for
use as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to
accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 8 persons at Project site. Keep office
clean and orderly.
E.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate. Cover finished permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or
similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable
effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of
noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms
near Project site.
B.
Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around
excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater
from heavy rains.
C.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed,
provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-7
.
D.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and
similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material
drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials.
Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with
load-bearing, wood-framed construction.
Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.
E.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
F.
Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities,
install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against
reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1.
Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served, with sign mounted above.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers.
Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of
extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended
purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each
usable stairwell.
Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fireprotection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking
in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1.
2.
C.
Protect from
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated
results and to avoid possibility of damage.
Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines.
Protect from damage during excavation operations.
Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
01500-8
.
D.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as
available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to
permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
E.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having
jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
01600-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 01600
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of
products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard
warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Division 1 Section "Allowances" for products selected under an allowance.
Division 1 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for contract closeout.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and
installations specified to be warranted.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.
1.
2.
Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or
model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product
literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.
Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.
B.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.
D.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for
a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.
01600-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
E.
1.4
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents,
either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for
Owner.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each
product.
1.
2.
Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals
Schedule.
Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.
Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for
variations from Contract requirements.
a.
B.
At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and
designations that must be established early in Contract period.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.5
Specification Section number and title.
Generic name used in the Contract Documents.
Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.
Manufacturer's name and address.
Supplier's name and address.
Installer's name and address.
Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.
Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery
date.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more
products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.
01600-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.
1.6
Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.
If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
1.7
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage.
Storage: Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Specified Form: Forms are included with the Specifications. Prepare a written document
using appropriate form properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
01600-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications
establish "salient characteristics" of products.
Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in "Comparable
Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.
Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following:
1.
Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a
single product and manufacturer, provide the product named.
a.
2.
2.2
Substitutions may be considered.
Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in
Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for
processing such selections.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected
at discretion of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
01600-5
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible
with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
COMPARABLE PRODUCTS
A.
Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to
other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.
Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.
Samples, if requested.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-1
SECTION 01700
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
1.4
Construction layout.
Field engineering and surveying.
General installation of products.
Coordination of Owner-installed products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for
coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and
patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.
Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project
Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and
levels, and final cleaning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of
improvements comply with requirements.
B.
Final Property Survey: Submit 5 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
A.
00300-2
Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in
jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying
services of the kind indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1.
B.
Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction
indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the
existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical
services.
Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities
serving Project site.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move,
or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances
located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-3
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
C.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
D.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents.
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are
discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels as needed to locate each
element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for building foundation. .
E.
Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and
levels. .
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-4
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
G.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
H.
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
3.5
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-5
F.
Exposed Surfaces: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from
damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Cutting and Patching: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
1.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
H.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
I.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
J.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
K.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.6
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.7
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.8
00300-6
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up
with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
00300-1
SECTION 01770
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Final cleaning.
Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment
for Substantial and Final Completion.
Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final
Completion construction photographs and negatives.
Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.
Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record
Specifications, and Record Product Data.
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance
manual requirements.
Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements
for products of those Sections.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner.
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to
defects.
Advise Owner's
with mockups,
operation, and
eliminate visual
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or
will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
00300-2
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of
construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1.
1.5
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for
acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three (3) copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
00300-3
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of black-line white prints of Contract Drawings
and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
D.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated
in Product Data.
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.7
00300-4
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings and Record Specifications where
applicable.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals:
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Maintenance Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
1.8
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the
Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is
indicated.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
B.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
C.
00300-5
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven (7) days' advance
notice.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction, and course content.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
C.
00300-6
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign
substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
02361-1
TERMITE CONTROL
SECTION 02361
TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following for termite control:
1.
1.3
Soil treatment.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EPA: Environmental Protection Agency.
B.
PCO: Pest control operator.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Treatments and application instructions, including EPA-Registered Label.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that
treatments furnished comply with requirements.
C.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project
names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
D.
Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report
for Owner's record information, including the following as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Date and time of application.
Moisture content of soil before application.
Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide.
Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
Dilutions, methods, volumes, and rates of application used.
Areas of application.
Water source for application.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
TERMITE CONTROL
STOKES ARCHITECTURAL INC.
02361-2
TERMITE CONTROL
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project
and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is
an experienced installer who employs workers trained and approved by bait station system
manufacturer to install manufacturer's products.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal
registration number, to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or
frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label
requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting
operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before
construction.
WARRANTY
A.
General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of
the Contract Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite
control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of
subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty
period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.
C.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or
foaming agent, and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions
that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and
TERMITE CONTROL
02361-3
TERMITE CONTROL
rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the
product's EPA-Registered Label.
B.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
AgrEvo Environmental Health, Inc.; a Company of Hoechst and Schering, Berlin.
American Cyanamid Co.; Agricultural Products Group; Specialty Products Department.
Bayer Corp.; Garden & Professional Care.
DowElanco.
FMC Corp.; Pest Control Specialties.
Zeneca Professional Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation
work, landscaping, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with
application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of
wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes,
formwork, and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations.
B.
Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could
decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be
treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be
applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer.
C.
Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3
APPLICATION, GENERAL
A.
3.4
General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with
manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products.
APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A.
Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity
required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of
termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a
TERMITE CONTROL
02361-4
TERMITE CONTROL
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and
under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly.
1.
2.
Slabs-on-Grade: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building
slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete
footings and slabs are placed.
Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls
and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout
around footings.
B.
Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry.
C.
Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until groundsupported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label
instructions.
D.
Post warning signs in areas of application.
E.
Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
TERMITE CONTROL
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
03301-1
SECTION 03301
INSULATING CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
1.02
1.03
SUMMARY
A.
Comply with the requirements for Division 1.
B.
Supply and installation of Insulating Concrete Forms (ICF), installation of reinforcing steel
and placement of concrete within formwork.
C.
Adequate bracing and falsework shall be provided by the Installing Contractor to comply
with all applicable Codes and construction document specifications.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, tools and equipment to perform the installation of Insulating
Concrete Formwork system forms in accordance with all ICF manufactures
recommended guidelines.
B.
Furnish all labor to include placement of reinforcing steel within forms, placement of
concrete into forms, and final cleanup.
PRODUCTS SUPPLIED BUT NOT SPECIFIED OR INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A.
1.04
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT SPECIFIED OR SUPPLIED UNDER THIS SECTION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
1.05
Sleeves
Inserts
Anchors
Bolts
Reinforcing Steel
Window and Door Opening Bucks
Concrete
RELATED SECTIONS
B.
D.
E.
F.
G.
K.
L.
1.06
EPS compatible modified bituminous sheet or fluid applied waterproofing membranes.
Section 03300
Division 4
Division 5
Division 6
Section 07 13 00
Division 8
Section 9260
-
Cast-In-Place Concrete
Masonry
Metals
Wood, Plastics and Composites
Sheet Waterproofing
Doors and Windows
Gypsum Board
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.07
1.08
03301-2
DEFINITIONS
A.
ICF Bracing System - a form alignment and scaffold system designed exclusively for use
with Insulating Concrete Forms.
B.
Contractor Installer- An installation contractor, who has received instructional training in
the installation of ICF wall system forms (as administered by ICF manufacturer)
C.
Technical Advisor- A technical representative, usually a staff member of a Distribution
Firm, who has received instructional training in the installation of ICF wall system forms
(as administered by ICF manufacturer) and is in the capacity of supervising an installation
crew on site.
D.
EPS- Acronym for “Expanded Polystyrene” when referencing the insulating foam
component of the ICF wall system form.
E.
ICF - Acronym for “Insulating Concrete Form”.
F.
Window or Door Opening Buck - a pre-manufactured or site constructed frame assembly
consisting of wood or plastic material used to frame a rough opening within the forming
system that will retain concrete around the opening. The frame can also provide for
subsequent anchorage of doors and windows within the wall assembly.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Insulating Concrete Form wall system shall consist of two opposing panels of flame
resistant Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) connected by high-density polypropylene webs.
B.
Wall system to provide min. 4”, 6”, 8” or 10” (100, 160, 200 or 250mm) wall section (as
required) at all locations throughout wall area.
C.
Wall system webs to provide min. 1” (25mm) wide fastening strips @ 8” (200mm) o/c
flush to ICF wall face for full wall height to facilitate direct fastening of interior and exterior
finishes.
D.
Wall system to provide accurate positioning of steel reinforcement within form cavity to
conform to reinforcing requirements of ACI 318.
E.
EPS foam panels with concrete to provide min. insulation levels as noted:
6” (160 mm) Cavity Form Unit: R 22.1 (RSI 3.89)
1.09
2
F.
EPS foam to provide maximum vapor permeation of 3.5 Perm-in. (200 ng/Pa.s.m )
G.
Finished wall assembly to provide min. rating of STC 50 sound attenuation performance.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit relevant laboratory tests or data to validate product compliance
with performance criteria specified prior to commencement of work under this Section.
B.
Code Compliance Data: Submit relevant code compliance data, to include current
manufacturers ICC-ES Evaluation Report.
B.
Submit copy of Manufacturer’s Product Manual and Installation Instructions.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
03301-3
Shop Drawings:
Submit drawings indicating dimensions of ICF form types and
typical details required to complete the ICF installation, if not already specified with
project drawings or specifications.
.
1.10
1.11
1.12
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Contractor shall engage a trained ICF Contractor Installer or Technical Advisor for the
duration of the work under this Section.
B.
Contractor Installer /Technical Advisor shall furnish proof of three years of experience in
installing this product and meet Manufacturer’s qualifying criteria. Installer shall furnish
proof of training documentation to Contractor prior to commencement of work under this
Section.
D.
Site Mock-up: If required, construct sample wall mock-up panel to include full wall system
and details, located where directed by Consultant. Panel may form part of finished work if
approved by Consultant.
E.
Contractor Installer/Technical Advisor to meet with Contractor prior to material delivery on
site to co-ordinate provision of access, storage area, and protection of the ICF product
and spatial requirements for form alignment placement steel storage and forming.
F.
Pre-installation meeting: Prior to starting ICF work, convene meeting at project site.
Include Contract Installer and sub-trades responsible for installing work that requires
interface or modification to the ICF wall system.
G.
Installation to comply with project drawings, specifications, governing building codes and
regulations, and Manufacturer’s installation manual or guide.
DELIVERY STORAGE and HANDLING
A.
Deliver products in original factory packaging, bearing identification of product,
manufacturer and batch/lot number.
B.
Handle and store products in location to prevent damaging and soiling.
C.
Ensure that UV protection is provided for material, should on-site storage
extend beyond 30 days.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.13
COORDINATION
A.
1.14
Use appropriate measures for protection and supplementary heating when required to
ensure proper curing conditions in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations if
installation is carried out during periods of weather where temperatures are below
minimum specified by governing Building Code for concrete and masonry.
Ensure those materials listed under Sub-Section 1.03 and 1.04 are provided to
Contractor Installer prior to commencement of work under this Section.
WARRANTY
A.
Contact Manufacturer for supply of written copy of specific warranties of the product.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
03301-4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURER’S
A.
2.02
ARXX Corporation or equal.
MATERIALS
A.
Insulating concrete forms shall be supplied by an approved manufactured listed in SubSection 2.01 above.
B.
Form units to be supplied through an authorized ICF Distributor.
C.
2.03
Substitutes and alternates will not be accepted. (See Section 1.06).
MANUFACTURED ICF COMPONENTS
A. Contractor to provide dimension drawings for each ICF product, proposed for proper
execution of the work:
ARXX Corporation - Arxx Prime ICF system
(a)
6” Standard Form Units
6” Core - 48"L x 11 ½” W x 16 ¾”H
(b) 6” Left and Right 90° Corners x16 ¾”H
(c) 6” and 8” Left and Right Corners x 12”H
2.04
2.05
CONCRETE
A.
Concrete supplied under Section 03300 shall be of strength as specified by the design
engineer (measured at 28 days). Recommended aggregate size to be 3/8” (10mm)
aggregate for the 4” and 6” (100 and 160mm) forms and, ¾” (19mm) aggregate for the 8”
and 10” (200 and 250mm) forms.
B.
Recommended concrete slump is 5” to 6” +/- 1” (125 to 150mm +/- 25mm) (subject to
design revision to suit application and ICF manufactures specifications).
REINFORCING STEEL
A. Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Section 03 20 00 and shall be supplied under that
Section for placement by the ICF Contractor Installer.
B. Reinforcing steel grade, size, placement and spacing shall be as specified by the project
design engineer of record in accordance with the project drawings or specifications or
prescriptive reinforcement tables applicable to the specific project.
2.06
WALL ALIGNMENT SYSTEM
A.
B.
As an integral installation component of an Insulating Concrete Form wall system and to
aid in the construction of the wall system, to provide an adjustable device for ensuring
plumbness of the wall during construction, an ICF Alignment Scaffold System shall be
used.
ICF Alignment Scaffold System to be used to be OSHA compliant.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
03301-5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
3.02
Inspect all areas included in Scope of Work to establish extent of work and verify site
access conditions.
SITE VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A.
3.03
Verify that site conditions are as set out in Part 1- General Conditions.
D.
Examine footings installed under Section 03300 are within +/-¼”(6mm) of level and that
steps in footings are consistent with height of ICF forms.
E.
Ensure all required testing and verification of footings and/or foundation installed under
Section 03300 have been conducted and approved, prior to ICF installation.
F.
If specified, ensure reinforcing steel dowels are in place at specified centers along footing
lengths.
PREPARATION
A.
3.04
Clean all debris from top of footings prior to commencing work.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Installation of forms to be in strict accordance with Manufacturer’s Product Manual as
supplied in evidence to contractor under Sub Section 1.10 of this Section.
The Installation Contractor shall ensure Manufacturer’s procedures for the following work
are employed on site (As outlined in the Manufacturer’s Installation Manual):
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
3.05
First Course Placement
Horizontal Reinforcement Placement
Successive Course Placement
Door and Window Opening Construction
Form Alignment and Scaffolding Installation
Vertical Reinforcement Placement
Pre-Concrete Placement Inspection
Concrete Placement
Alignment Assembly Removal
SERVICE PENETRATIONS, INSERTS, AND EMBEDDMENTS
A.
Service penetrations (e.g.- electrical service conduits, water service pipes, air supply and
exhaust ducts etc.) shall be installed at the required locations as indicated by the
appropriate trade.
B.
Service penetrations exceeding 16” x 16” (400mm x 400mm) in area shall be reinforced.
C.
Prior to concrete placement, install service penetration sleeves (supplied by others) at
designated locations to create voids where services can be passed through at later date.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.06
3.07
03301-6
D.
Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, steel embeds and other components of other work.
E.
Locate and set in place items which will be cast directly into concrete.
FORM CLEANING
A.
Clean forms as installation proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
C.
Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
CLEANUP
A. Clean up and properly dispose of all debris remaining on job site related to the installation
of the insulated concrete forms.
3.08
PROTECTION
A.
Provide temporary coverage of installation to reduce exposure to Ultra Violet light should
final finish application be delayed longer than 60 days.
END OF SECTION
03520-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 03520
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE ROOF INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes cast-in-place lightweight concrete roof insulation for roof decks.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Lightweight Concrete Roof Insulation: Low-density concrete, with an oven-dry unit weight not
exceeding 50 lb/cu. ft. and classified as follows:
1.
2.
1.4
Aggregate Lightweight Concrete: Low-density concrete made with portland cement,
water, air-entraining admixture, and either perlite or vermiculite mineral aggregates.
Cellular Lightweight Concrete: Low-density concrete made with portland cement, water,
and air-producing foaming agents.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include mixing and application instructions
for each type of lightweight concrete roof insulation.
B.
Design Mixes: For each lightweight concrete roof insulation mix.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed lightweight concrete roof
insulation similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose
work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
1.
Installer shall be approved by lightweight concrete roof insulation manufacturer.
2.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance
Directory," from It’s "Directory of Listed Products," or from the listings of another testing
and inspecting agency.
Provide vermiculite aggregates containing no detectable asbestos as determined by the method
specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy."
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.6
03520-2
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original undamaged packages or acceptable bulk
containers.
B.
Store packaged materials to protect them from elements or physical damage.
C.
Do not use cement that shows indications of moisture damage, caking, or other deterioration.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not place lightweight concrete roof insulation unless ambient temperature is 32 deg F and
rising.
B.
Do not place lightweight concrete roof insulation during rain or on surfaces covered with
standing water or ice.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Perlite Aggregate Lightweight Concrete:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Airlite Processing Corporation of Florida.
Carolina Perlite Company.
Harborlite Corporation.
Redco II.
Silbrico Corporation.
Vermiculite Aggregate Lightweight Concrete:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Mandoval Vermiculite Products Inc.
Palmetto Vermiculite Company.
Siplast Inc.
Strong-Lite Products Corporation.
Vermiculite Products, Inc.
MATERIALS
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
03520-3
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
B.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.
C.
Mineral Aggregate: ASTM C 332, Group I, vermiculite or perlite.
D.
Foaming Agent: ASTM C 869.
E.
Water: Clean, potable.
F.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
G.
Steel Wire Mesh: Cold-drawn steel wire, galvanized, 0.041-inch diameter, woven into 2-inch
hexagonal mesh, and reinforced with a longitudinal 0.062-inch- diameter wire spaced 3 inches
apart.
1.
2.3
Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be
incorporated into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Keydeck," Style No. 2160-21619, by Keystone Steel & Wire Company.
DESIGN MIXES
A.
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of lightweight concrete roof insulation by either
laboratory trial batch or field-test data methods. For trial batch method, use a qualified
independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
1.
B.
2.4
Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of portland cement by weight.
Limit water-soluble chloride ions to the maximum percentage by weight of cement or
cementitious material permitted by ACI 301.
AGGREGATE LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
A.
Design mix to produce lightweight concrete roof insulation with the following minimum physical
properties using the minimum amount of water necessary to produce a workable mix.
1.
B.
Perlite Aggregate Mix: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Do not exceed maximum air content recommended by aggregate manufacturer.
As-Cast Unit Weight: 38 to 44 lb/cu. ft at point of placement, when tested according to
ASTM C 138.
Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 24 to 30 lb/cu. ft., when tested according to ASTM C 495.
Compressive Strength: Minimum 125 psi, when tested according to ASTM C 495.
Cement-to-Aggregate Ratio, by Volume: 1:6.
Vermiculite Aggregate Mix: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
As-Cast Unit Weight: 45 to 49 lb/cu. ft. at point of placement, when tested according to
ASTM C 138.
Oven-Dry Unit Weight: 23 to 26 lb/cu. ft., when tested according to ASTM C 495.
Compressive Strength: Minimum 140 psi, when tested according to ASTM C 495.
03520-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
4.
Cement-to-Aggregate Ratio, by Volume: 1:6.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Control Joints: Install control joints at perimeter of roof deck and at junctures with vertical
surfaces, including curbs, walls, and vents, for full depth of lightweight concrete roof insulation.
Fill control joints with joint filler.
B.
Reinforcing Mesh: Place steel wire mesh with longest dimension perpendicular to steel deck
ribs. Cut mesh to fit around roof openings and projections. MIXING AND PLACING
C.
Mix and place lightweight concrete roof insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions, using equipment and procedures to avoid segregation of mix and loss of air
content.
D.
Deposit and screed lightweight concrete roof insulation in a continuous operation until an entire
panel or section of roof area is completed. Do not vibrate or work mix except for screeding or
floating. Place to depths and slopes indicated.
E.
Finish top surface smooth, free of ridges and depressions, and maintain surface in condition to
receive subsequent roofing system.
F.
Begin curing operations immediately after placement, and air cure for not less than three days
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
If ambient temperature falls below 32 deg F, protect lightweight concrete roof insulation from
freezing and maintain temperature recommended by manufacturer for 72 hours after placement.
3.2
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
Refinish, or remove and replace, lightweight concrete roof insulation if surfaces are excessively
scaled or too rough to receive roofing, according to roofing membrane manufacturer's written
requirements.
B.
Remove and replace lightweight concrete roof insulation that fails to comply with compressivestrength and oven-dry unit weight requirements.
04720-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 04720
CAST STONE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
B.
1.3
Cast stone window sills.
1.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include
dimensions; details of reinforcement and anchorages, if any; and indication of finished faces.
1.
Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors.
C.
Samples: For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar, showing the full range of colors available.
E.
Samples for Verification: For each mortar color required, showing the full range expected in the
finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar ingredients to be used
on Project. Label samples to indicate type and amount of colorant used.
F.
Full-Size Samples: For each type of cast stone unit required. Make available for Architect's
review at Project site before installing cast stone.
1.
Approved Samples may be installed in the Work.
CAST STONE
04720-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing cast stone units similar to
those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.
B.
Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source
or producer for each aggregate.
1.6
A.
Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets.
1.
2.
Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move
cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports.
Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers.
Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under
covers to prevent condensation.
B.
Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate production and delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need
for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CAST STONE MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following:
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when
tested according to ASTM C 114.
C.
Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as
needed to produce required textures.
D.
Fine Aggregates: Manufactured or natural sands complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as
needed to produce required textures.
CAST STONE
04720-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
E.
Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by the manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures used.
1.
F.
Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result
in an air content of 5 to 7 percent.
Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M.
1.
2.
Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M.
Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M.
G.
Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts:
ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
H.
Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M,
and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123.
2.2
Fabricated from stainless steel complying with
CAST STONE UNITS
A.
Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364.
1.
Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory
testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364.
B.
Reinforce units as indicated and as required by ASTM C 1364. Use galvanized or epoxycoated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of material.
C.
Fabricate units with sharp edges and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all
exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Cure and finish units as follows:
1.
2.
E.
Slope exposed horizontal surfaces at least 1:12, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.
Cure units in totally enclosed curing room under dense fog and water spray at 95 percent
relative humidity for 24 hours.
Acid etch units to remove cement film from surfaces indicated to be finished.
Color and Texture: Provide units with fine-grained texture and buff color resembling Indiana
limestone.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone.
B.
CAST STONE
04720-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry" for
installing stone units.
B.
Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other
attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. Set units accurately in locations
indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated
tolerances.
C.
Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchors
and ties into mortar joints as units are set.
1.
Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
3.3
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved
Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.
B.
Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying
with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears
before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
Clean cast stone by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes No. 20 Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
CAST STONE
04810-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 04810
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:
1.
Face brick.
2.
Mortar and grout.
3.
Masonry joint reinforcement.
4.
Ties and anchors.
5.
Embedded flashing.
6.
Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
B.
1.
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.
C.
Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:
1.
2.
D.
Allowances: Furnish the following under the allowances indicated, as specified in Division 1
Section "Allowances":
1.
1.3
Cast-stone trim, furnished under Division 4 Section "Cast Stone."
Steel lintels for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications."
Face brick under the Face Brick Allowances.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product
specified.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:
1.
2.
C.
Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures
available for each different exposed masonry unit required.
Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required, showing the full range of
exposed colors, textures, and dimensions to be expected in the completed construction.
04810-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.
Colored mortar Samples for each color required, showing the full range of colors
expected in the finished construction. Make samples using the same sand and mortar
ingredients to be used on Project.
D.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
E.
Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be
used to comply with cold-weather requirements.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one
source from a single manufacturer for each product required.
B.
Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component
and from one source or producer for each aggregate.
1.5
A.
Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not
use cementitious materials that have become damp.
B.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination avoided.
C.
Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and
emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on
elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with
weatherproof cover.
D.
Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt
and oil.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when
construction is not in progress.
1.
B.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place.
Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left
exposed. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.
1.
2.
3.
Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings
spread on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
04810-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
4.
Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
C.
Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by
frost or by freezing conditions.
D.
Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity
conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial
shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required.
1.
When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater
than 8 mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set
masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
BRICK
A.
General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of brick required:
1.
B.
2.2
Provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished for ends of sills
and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick
surfaces.
Face Brick: As selected by Owner.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color
indicated.
B.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C.
Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.
D.
Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.
E.
Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16
sieve.
1.
2.
F.
White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.
Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural-colored sand or ground marble, granite, or other
sound stone; of color necessary to produce required mortar color.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
04810-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
G.
Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use
in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry
mortar.
H.
Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with
ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of
composition indicated.
1.
2.3
Water: Potable.
MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A.
General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:
1.
Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for exterior walls.
2.
Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7.
3.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7.
4.
Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet , with prefabricated corner and tee units.
B.
For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods and
cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.
2.4
TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL
A.
General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from materials that
comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.
2.5
ADJUSTABLE MASONRY-VENEER ANCHORS
A.
General: Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist
tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to
wood or metal studs, and as follows:
1.
B.
Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both
tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch .
Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie section and a metal
anchor section complying with the following requirements:
1.
Anchor Section: Sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom and with raised ribstiffened strap stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and plate for
connection of wire tie.
a.
C.
Plate 5/8 inch wide by 3-5/8 inches long; slot clearance formed between face of
plate and back of strap shall not exceed diameter of wire tie by more than 1/32
inch.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head, No. 10 diameter
by length required to penetrate by not less than 3 exposed threads, and with the following
corrosion protective coating:
04810-5
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.6
Organic polymer coating with salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per
ASTM B 117.
EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A.
Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and below:
1.
Copper: 10-oz./sq. ft. weight or 0.0135 inch thick for fully concealed flashing; 16-oz./sq.
ft. weight or 0.0216 inch thick elsewhere.
B.
Contractor's Option for Concealed Flashing: For flashing partly exposed to the exterior, use
metal flashing specified above. For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use [one of] the
following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Manufacturer's standard composite flashing product
consisting of a pliable and highly adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a
high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film.
C.
Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
D.
Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by the flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to
each other and to substrates.
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A.
2.8
Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4 inches long.
MASONRY CLEANERS
A.
Job-Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and
1/2-cup (0.14-L) dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water.
B.
Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing
mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use
by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
2.9
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A.
General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at the same rate for all mortar, regardless of
weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.
04810-6
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
B.
Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients
before delivering to Project site.
C.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification.
D.
Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color
required. Limit pigments to the following percentages of cement content by weight:
1.
For mineral-oxide pigments and mortar cement mortar, not more than 5 percent.
2.
For carbon-black pigment and mortar cement mortar, not more than 1 percent.
E.
Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates
combined with selected cementitious materials.
1.
Mix to match Architect's sample.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units
as required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible,
use full-size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing,
unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut
edges concealed.
B.
Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and
textures.
1.
C.
3.2
Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in.
per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not
wet at the time of laying.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A.
Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:
B.
For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs and reveals, do not vary
from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum.
C.
For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum.
D.
For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills and reveals, do not vary from
level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum.
04810-7
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
E.
For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of
adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.
F.
For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch.
3.3
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A.
3.4
Lay solid brick-size masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush
head joints.
ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS
A.
Anchor masonry veneers to Insulated Concrete Forms (ICF) and wood stud wall framing with
masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Fasten each anchor section to ICF and with two metal fasteners of type indicated.
Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide 2 inches of air space between back of
masonry veneer and face of ICF or sheathing.
Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and
down.
Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches
o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 3.5 sq. ft. of wall area. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches
around perimeter.
LINTELS
A.
Install steel lintels where indicated.
B.
Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
3.6
FLASHING, WEEP HOLES
A.
General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges,
other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B.
Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture
flashing. Unless otherwise indicated, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and
cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive,
sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
C.
Install flashing as follows:
1.
At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing from exterior face of veneer, through veneer,
up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, and behind air-infiltration barrier or building paper.
2.
At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 4 inches into masonry at each
end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 4 inches at ends and turn flashing up not less
than 2 inches to form a pan.
04810-8
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
D.
Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry
immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:
1.
Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in brick sills. Turn wicking down
at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
2.
Space weep holes 24 inches o.c.
E.
Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with outside face of wall after mortar has set.
3.7
REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.
C.
In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
D.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.8
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape
hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding
with cleaning of masonry.
Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering
them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.
Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing the surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
Clean brick by the bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical
Notes No. 20, using job-mixed detergent solution.
Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to
type of stain on exposed surfaces.
MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A.
Recycling: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At
completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
05500-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
Loose steel lintels.
B.
1.
1.3
Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for structural-steel framing system components.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction,
verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without
field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FERROUS METALS
A.
2.2
Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A.
Fabricate loose structural-steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B.
Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to one-twelfth of clear
span, but not less than 8 inches.
C.
Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into masonry
construction.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05521-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 05521
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
1.
Steel tube handrails and railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance of Handrails and Railings: Provide handrails and railings capable of
withstanding the following structural loads without exceeding allowable design working stresses
of materials for handrails, railings, anchors, and connections:
1.
Handrails Not Serving As Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied
as indicated:
a.
b.
c.
1.4
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point and in any direction.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
B.
1.5
Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected handrails and railings.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation of handrails and railings. Include plans,
elevations, sections, component details, and attachments to other Work.
STORAGE
A.
1.6
Store handrails and railings in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify handrail and railing dimensions by field measurements before
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
05521-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
1.7
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating handrails and railings
without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate installation of anchorages for handrails and railings. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule installation so handrails and railings are mounted only on completed walls. Do not
support temporarily by any means that does not satisfy structural performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:
a.
b.
2.2
Humane Equipment Co.
Wagner: R & B Wagner, Inc.
METALS
A.
General: Provide metal free from pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and
other imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B.
Steel and Iron:
requirements:
1.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; finish, type, and weight class as follows:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Provide steel and iron in the form indicated, complying with the following
Black finish, unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.
Type F, or Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade
and weight are required by structural loads.
Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing, ASTM A 500, Grade A, unless another grade is
required by structural loads.
Iron Castings: Malleable iron complying with ASTM A 47, Grade 32510.
05521-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
2.3
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.
FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS
A.
Fasteners for Anchoring Handrails and Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type,
grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring handrails and railings
to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
B.
Fasteners for Interconnecting Handrail and Railing Components: Use fasteners fabricated from
same basic metal as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are
corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.
2.4
PAINT
A.
Shop Primers: Provide primers to comply with applicable requirements in Division 9 Section
"Painting."
B.
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance
to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability
to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate handrails and railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,
dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that
required to support structural loads.
B.
Assemble handrails and railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing
and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:
1.
By bending.
2.
By inserting prefabricated flush-elbow fittings.
D.
Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature
for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member
throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of handrail and railing components.
E.
Nonwelded Connections: Fabricate handrails and railings by connecting members with
concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive where this
is manufacturer's standard splicing method.
05521-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
F.
2.6
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect handrail and railing members to other work, unless otherwise
indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
For steel handrails and railings, provide ferrous-metal fittings, brackets, fasteners, and sleeves.
B.
Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of handrail and railing components. Comply with
requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Primer
need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install handrails and railings. Set handrails and
railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and
levels and free from rack.
C.
Adjust handrails and railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
Space posts at interval indicated, but not less than that required by structural loads.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing handrails and railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3
ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS
A.
Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from
inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.
B.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
C.
Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
06100-1
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preservative treatment of wood.
B.
Fire retardant treatment of wood.
C.
Miscellaneous wood framing, sheathing and subflooring.
D.
Concealed wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets, and wood trim.
E.
Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips.
F.
Wood framing of rough opening for installation of attic stair, including blocking and supports.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel connectors and support.
B.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sill and miscellaneous flashings (see Drawings.)
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
AFPA WCD No.1 - Manual for Wood Frame Construction; American Forest and Paper Association.
B.
APA The Engineered Wood Association (APA):
1. Exposure 1 construction requirements.
2. Performance Standards and Qualification Policy for Structural-Use Panels.
C.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A 36M - Carbon Structural Steel.
2. A 525M - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Hot-Dip Process.
3. E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
4. C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
D.
American Wood Preservers Bureau - LP2 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E.
American Wood-Preservers’ Association (AWPA)
1. A3 - Determining Penetration of Preservatives and Fire Retardants.
2. P5 - Water Borne Preservatives.
3. C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties-Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process.
4. C20 - Structural Lumber: Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.
F.
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology.
G.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
H.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc..
I.
Florida Building Code 2004, Chapter 23 "Wood." Wall, Floor and Roof framing, decking and
sheathing. Connections, fasteners, and fastening schedule. Design loads, strengths and stress
ROUGH CARPENTRY
STOKES-LAMBERT ARCHITECTURAL, INC.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
06100-2
capacities, size and spacing of members and fasteners specified in the FBC shall govern in all
cases, including requirements for wind-borne debris region with 140 mph wind.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: For site fabricated frames, indicate dimensions, wood species and grades,
component profiles, drilled holes, fasteners, connectors, details, and sequence of erection.
1. For factory-assembled products to be installed at the site, indicate dimensions that have
been verified at the field including existing conditions that may affect the framing and
structural support necessary for proper installation.
a. See 2.5 below for information about Folding Attic Stair.
B.
Wood Preservative and Fire Retardant treatment data and certification.
C.
Manufacturer's preparation instructions, recommendations and installation methods.
D.
Manufacturer's standard limited lifetime warranty against material and manufacturing defects.
Include manufacturer's standard 90 day warranty against sanding due to moisture absorption
during installation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: SPIB.
2. Lumber of other species or grades, or graded by other agencies, is acceptable provided
structural and appearance characteristics are eq uivalent to or better than products
specified.
3. Provide products in compliance with APA Exposure 1 construction requirements.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent
deformation and allow air circulation. Follow manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A.
Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).
B.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D.
Stud Framing (2 x 2 through 2 x 6 ): See Drawings for Wall Types.
1. Species: Southern Yellow Pine (SYP or Spruce-Pine-Fir (SPF) as indicated.
2. Minimum Bending Strength: 1000 psi
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 1000 psi
E.
Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 x 6 through 4 x 16 ):
1. Species: Southern Yellow Pine (SYP) or Spruce-Pine-Fir (South) (SPF).
2. Minimum Bending Strength: 1000 psi
3. Minimum Compressive Strength: 1000 psi
4. Minimum Shear Strength: 90 psi
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
06100-3
2.2 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
APA Rated Floor Sheathing:
1. Exposure Class: 1.
2. Span Rating: 48/24.
3. Thickness: 3/4 inches, nominal.
B.
APA Rated Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, and as follows:
1. Structural I.
C.
APA Rated Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, and as follows:
1. Structural I.
D.
Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, water-resistant core, V-shaped long edges,
1/2"thick.
E.
Miscellaneous Panels:
1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade.
2. Exposed Plywood: PS 1, A-D, interior grade.
3. Electrical Component Mounting: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A.
B.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for high humidity and treated wood locations,
unfinished steel elsewhere.
2. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness
of sheathing.
Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions.
C.
Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
D.
Sill Flashing: As shown in the Drawings and specified in Section 07620.
E.
Subfloor Glue: Waterproof, water base, air cure type, cartridge dispensed.
F.
Building Paper: No. 15 asphalt felt. Double layer application where indicated. See Section 07260.
2.5 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA Treatment C2 using waterborne preservative
to 0.40 lb/cu ft retention.
1. Kiln dry after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2. Treat wood in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
3. Treat wood in contact with masonry, concrete, or exposed to weather.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FRAMING INSTALLATION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
06100-4
A.
Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower
required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B.
Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
C.
Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D.
Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and
spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA WCD 1 T11,
whichever is more stringent.
E.
Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that
are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
F.
Provide bridging at framing in excess of 8 feet span at mid-span. Fit solid blocking at ends of
members.
G.
Frame openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
H.
Provide miscellaneous members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS WOOD
A.
Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap
flashing joints 4" and seal.
B.
Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing. Puncture gasket cleanly and fit tightly to protruding
foundation anchor bolts.
C.
Coordinate installation of prefabricated wood trusses and plywood web joists.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Subflooring/Underlayment Combination: Glue and nail to framing; staples are not permitted.
Subflooring: With 3/4in thick strip flooring use either kiln dried boards of No. 1 or No. 2
Common Pine or other dense, Group 1 softwoods suitable for subfloors over wood joists, or
exterior sheathing grade plywood, 3/4" (23/32") performance rated products.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
1. Use plywood at building corners, for not less than 48 inches, measured horizontally.
2. Place building paper horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and ends.
3.4 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, per
manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
3.5 TOLERANCES
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
06100-5
A.
Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.
B.
Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet maximum.
C.
Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet
maximum.
END OF SECTION
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
06200-1
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Exterior standing and running trim.
Exterior hardboard siding.
Interior standing and running trim for field-painted finish.
Stairs and railings.
Laminate covered counters.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not
exposed to view.
Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop-fabricated interior
woodwork.
Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Include construction
details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and
colors.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for
each type of material indicated.
1.4
A.
Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber,
plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings.
B.
Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified
for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store
only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
FINISH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.5
06200-2
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC
system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels
during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and
warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the
American Lumber Standards' Committee Board of Review.
B.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
D.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
2.2
EXTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A.
Lumber Trim for Painted Applications: Kiln-dried, solid lumber with surfaced (smooth) face and
of the following species and grade:
1.
2.
2.3
Clear redwood; RIS.
Grade B & B pressure-preservative-treated southern pine; SPIB.
SIDING
A.
2.4
Fiber-cement panels: as manufactured by James Hardie (Hardi Board).
INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
A.
Softwood Lumber Trim: Kiln-dried finished lumber (S4S) of one of the following species and
grades:
1.
2.
3.
Grade C Select eastern white pine; NELMA or NLGA.
Grade C Select white woods; WWPA.
Grade C & Btr Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir south; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
FINISH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.5
06200-3
STAIRS
A.
2.6
Interior Stairs: As detailed.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials, in
sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches into substrate, unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer:
1.
Stainless steel.
B.
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
C.
Sealants: Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials
required for sealing siding work.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with
manufacturer's written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative
humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B.
Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
finished work:
1.
2.
C.
Exterior standing and running trim wider than 5 inches.
Interior standing and running trim.
Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B.
Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
FINISH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
3.3
Prime lumber for exterior applications to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to
required lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
B.
Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch maximum
offset for reveal installation.
Install stairs with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers
and with no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers
within each flight.
Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide
cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at
corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use
scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across
joints, where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Match color and grain pattern across joints.
Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent
movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill
holes.
Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat grain lumber with bark side exposed to
weather.
SIDING INSTALLATION
A.
Fiber-cement Siding: Install siding as recommended by panel manufacturer.
1.
2.
B.
3.6
06200-4
Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
Conceal fasteners to greatest practical extent by countersinking and filling.
Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings.
STAIR AND RAILING INSTALLATION
FINISH CARPENTRY
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
A.
Treads and Risers at Interior Stairs: Secure treads and risers by gluing and nailing to rough
carriages.
1.
3.7
06200-5
Closed Stringers: House treads and risers into wall stringers.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.8
Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish
carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A.
Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi exposed surfaces.
finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
FINISH CARPENTRY
Touch up factory-applied
07185-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 07185
PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC COATING – WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
B.
1.3
D.
E.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation methods.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
1.6
ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
ICC - Acceptance Criteria for Walking Decks.
CCMC - Technical Guide for PVC Sheet Waterproofing (Exposed to Light
Pedestrian Traffic).
CGSB 37.54-95 - Roofing and Waterproofing Membrane, Sheet Applied, Flexible,
Polyvinyl Chloride.
CGSB 37-GP-55M - Application of Sheet Applied Flexible Polyvinyl Chloride Roofing
Membrane.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
1.5
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Scuppers, counterflashings, and
fascias.
Section 15160 - Roof drains.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
1.4
Traffic membrane, consisting of welded seam PVC waterproofing, over the following
surfaces as indicated on the Drawings:
1.
Balconies and roof decks.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in providing products of the type
specified in this section, with minimum of 15 years documented experience with
products in use.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing products of the type
specified with trained installer and currently certified by manufacturer.
A.
Deliver and store products in manufacturer’s original containers, dry and
undamaged, with seals and labels intact until ready for installation.
1.
Label uncured materials, both sheets and canned goods, with date of
manufacturer and shelf life.
2.
Do not use creased or damaged sheets.
3.
Do not use products after end of shelf life.
B.
Store and handle materials to prevent damage.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
D.
1.7
Place materials on pallets.
Prevent creasing of rolled materials.
Do not use polyethylene to cover stored materials (canvas tarpaulins are
acceptable).
Keep containers closed, except when removing materials from them.
Keep materials at temperature between 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C) and 80
degrees F (26.6 degrees C); if adhesives are exposed to lower temperature, verify
useability with manufacturer before using.
Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solventbased materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
07185-2
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer’s 10 year warranty for membrane leaks due to a
manufacturing defect, covering materials, and/or repair and replacement labor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturer: Provide products of Duradek/Durarail U.S. Inc., 1722 Iron
Street, North Kansas City, MO 64116. Toll Free Tel: 800-338-3568. Fax: 816-4212924. Email: [email protected]; Website: www.duradek.com.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 01600.
MATERIALS
A.
Traffic Membrane: Duradek Ultra; polyester reinforced PVC membrane with ultraviolet resistance, for fully-adhered installation with heat-welded seams and perimeter
attachment.
1.
Sheet Width: 54 inches (1371.5 mm).and 72 inches (1828.8mm).
2.
Overall Sheet Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.5 mm).
3.
PVC Film Thickness: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm).
4.
Weight: 50 oz/sq yd (1695 g/sq m).
5.
Color:
a.
As selected by Owner.
B.
Miscellaneous Accessories:
1.
Provide PVC Coated Metal, Scuppers, Overflow Drains, Roof Drains, and
Trims as required for proper installation.
2.
Provide Surface Conditioners, Adhesives, Sealants, Fillers, and Cleaners as
required for proper installation.
3.
Provide mechanical fastening devices color coordinated to membrane color.
C.
Adjacent Flashings: Coordinate with flashing specified in Section 07620.
07185-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
Verify that deck is:
1.
Secure, well supported, solid, and in accordance with local code structural
requirements.
2.
Properly sloped to drains, valleys, or eaves.
3.
Clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, and projections.
4.
Dry and free of ice.
C.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
3.4
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and applicable codes.
Do not install when temperature is below 25 degrees F or above 98 degrees F. Do
not install when winds are gusting over 30 mph (48.3 kph).
Do not dilute primers, adhesives, coatings, or sealants.
Install membrane with minimum number of seams possible. Overlap seams ¾ inch
(19 mm), to shed water; heat-weld all seams.
Adhere membrane to substrate.
Mechanically fasten all perimeter edges and penetrations.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
Coordinate timing of installation to avoid construction traffic over completed traffic
membrane surfaces.
Concrete Deck: Fill surface imperfections and variations with leveling compound.
Test for and remove surface contaminants.
Coordinate installation with installation of drains and similar accessories.
Install flashings and accessories. Seal around all penetrations, drains, and edges.
Membrane shall not come in contact with bituminous materials or polystyrene
insulations. Contact manufacturer for additional information.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
Clean soiled areas in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
C.
Protect installed products until completion of project.
Avoid construction traffic over completed traffic membrane surfaces.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
07212-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 07212
BATT INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.
B.
Acoustical batt insulation in framed walls, partitions and above ceilings.
B.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic insulation.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.
B.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2007.
C.
ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000.
D.
ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
Degrees C; 2004.
E.
NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
National Fire Protection Association; 2000.
F.
UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 1996.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions
required for installation and installation techniques.
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
successful installation.
1.06 SEQUENCING
A.
Sequence work to ensure fireproofing and firestop materials are in place before beginning work of this
section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to:
1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of
450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
2. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for
facing, if any.
3. Thermal Resistance:
a. Exterior Stud Walls: R-19.
4. Facing: FSK (foil-scrim-kraft) facing, one side.
5. Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
BATT INSULATION
07212-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
b.
c.
d.
B.
Acoustical Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; Unfaced preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit,
conforming to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
2.02
A.
Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.
Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
Johns Manville International, Inc: www.johnsmanville.com.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread: 10; maximum smoke developed:
10, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.
Fire Resistance Ratings: Passes ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall
assembly.
Sound Transmission Class: STC 50-55.
Dimensional Stability: Linear Shrinkage less than 0.1%
Thickness: 6”
Manufacturers:
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.
b. Johns Manville International, Inc: www.johnsmanville.com.
c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
Rigid closed cell extruded polystyrene thermal board insulation (Type 1): ASTM C578 Type X;
type, conforming to the following:
1. Board Size: 4' x 8'.
2. Board Thickness: 1 to 3 inches as required or as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Thermal Resistance: R = 5.0 per inch.
4. Water Absorption: In accordance with ASTM D2842 0.1 percent by volume maximum.
5. Compressive Strength: ASTM D1621, minimum 15 psi.
6. Flexural Strength: ASTM C203, minimum 40 psi.
7. Board Edges: Square edges.
8. Location: Masonry cavity walls and furred-out exterior walls.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Chemical Co. "Styrofoam Cavitymate SC". http://www.dow.com/styrofoam/
b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.
ACCESSORIES
Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering vapor retarder type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch and 3 inch
wide, with flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50 or less.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
ready to receive insulation.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.02 BATT INSTALLATION
A.
Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install in exterior wall spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D.
Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within
BATT INSULATION
07212-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
the plane of the insulation.
E.
Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces, unless
otherwise required by local building code. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane between framing
members.
F.
Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
3.03 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
B.
Perimeter Insulation: Extruded polystyrene, bead adhesive application.
C.
Cavity Wall Insulation: Extruded polystyrene, 1-1/2 inch thickness, bead adhesive application.
END OF SECTION
BATT INSULATION
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07218-1
SECTION 07218
POLYICYNENE SPRAY INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Polyicynene spray insulation at wall and ceiling surfaces.
A.
Section 04820 - Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies.
B.
Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C518
Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal
Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
2. D2863 Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to Support
Candle-like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index).
3. E84
Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
4. E90
Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss
of Building Partitions.
5. E96
Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Building Materials.
6. E283
Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Differences Across the Specimen.
B.
Florida Building Code, Section 2603 "Foam-Plastic Insulation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on materials, describing insulation properties, surface burning
characteristics.
B.
LEED Information: Indicate percentage of waste materials by weight diverted from landfill and
recycled.
C.
Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
requiring special treatment.
D.
Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with
minimum three years experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years
documented experience and certified by the manufacturer. Include a list of completed projects
within the last 3 years and verification information.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07218-2
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable requirements of FBC Section 2603 for flame spread and smokedeveloped indices, and shall satisfactorily pass the standard tests according to FM 4450 and
UL 1256.
B.
Surface-burning characteristics. Unless otherwise indicated in this section, foam plastic
insulation and foam plastic cores of manufactured assemblies shall have a flame spread index
of not more than 75 and a smoke-developed index of not more than 450 where tested in the
maximum thickness intended for use in accordance with ASTM E 84.
C.
In cold storage buildings, ice plants, food plants, food processing rooms and similar areas, the
thickness of foam plastic insulation shall not exceed 4," except where the building is equipped
throughout with an automatic fire sprinkler system in accordance with Section 903.3.1.1, in
which case the applied thickness shall not exceed 10" thick.
D.
Foam plastic insulation greater than 4 inches in thickness shall have a maximum flame spread
index of 75 and smoke-developed index of 450.
A.
Toxicity/Hazardous Materials: Outgassing/Reactivity:
1. Formaldehyde: Products containing urea-formaldehyde will not be permitted.
2. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs)/HCFCs: Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs or
HCFCs during the manufacturing process will not be permitted.
B.
Airtightness: Meet specific standards of the Energy Star Program: 1.5 Air Changes/Hr at 50 Pa.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Labeling and identification. Packages and containers of foam plastic insulation and foam plastic
insulation components delivered to the job site shall bear the label of an approved agency
showing the manufacturer’s name, the product listing, product identification and information
sufficient to determine that the end use will comply with the code requirements. Deliver
materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging.
B.
Store materials in an area protected from freezing and overheating damage according to
manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage and contamination.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A.
Icynene Inc. (www.icynene.com).
B.
Vapor Retarder: Vapor retarder paint or vapor diffusion retarder shall be as per the
recommendation of Icynene manufacturer.
2.2 MATERIALS
A.
Polyicynene Spray Insulation: Hydrophobic, low-density, open-cell modified polyicynene;
conforming to the following:
1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch): ASTM C518; 3.6 hr/sq ft/degree F/BTU. In.
2. Air Permeance (for 5.25 inches of material): ASTM E283; 0.0049 l/m2/second.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07218-3
3.
4.
5.
6.
Water Vapor Transmission (for 5 inches of material): ASTM E96; 10 perms.
Sound Transmission Class (STC): ASTM E90; STC 37 in wood stud wall.
Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM E90; NRC-0.7 in wood stud wall.
Corrosion: No significant corrosion when in contact with steel under 85 percent relative
humidity.
7. Bacterial or Fungal Growth: No growth; no material deterioration.
8. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: CAN 4-S102 PSC 3 Corner Wall Test; 510530/95-150, or Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E84; <20 / <400.
9. Fuel Contribution: ASTM E84; 0.
10. Oxygen Index: ASTM D2863; average value 23.1 percent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that substrate is free of any foreign material that will impede application.
C.
Verify that other work on and within spaces to be insulated is complete prior to application.
D.
Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect the application.
E.
Beginning of installation means applicator accepts existing conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive insulation.
B.
Mask and protect adjacent surfaces from overspray or damage.
C.
Remove foreign materials, dirt, grease, oil, paint, laitance, efflorescence, and other substances
that will affect application.
3.3 APPLICATION
A.
Apply insulation in accordance with manufacturer’s written application instructions.
B.
Apply insulation to a reasonably uniform monolithic density without voids.
C.
Apply to minimum cured thickness: See Drawings.
D.
Apply insulation to fill voids around doors and windows.
E.
Apply insulation to fill voids around accessible service and equipment penetrations, as noted on
drawings.
F.
Apply insulation to seal voids at truss ends to prevent wind scouring of ceiling insulation.
G.
Seal plumbing stacks, electrical wiring and other penetrations into attic to control air leakage.
H.
Apply insulation to fill voids around bathtubs to point of accessibility, as indicated on drawings.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07218-4
I.
Apply insulation in unvented roof spaces and cathedral ceiling areas as indicated on drawings.
J.
Where building is designed to meet the specific airtightness standards of the Energy Star
Program, apply insulation as recommended by manufacturer to provide airtight construction.
Apply caulking to seal joints between structural assemblies.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect application for insulation thickness and density.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit subsequent work to disturb applied insulation.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
A.
Plan and coordinate the insulation work to minimize the generation of offcuts and waste. Reuse
insulation scraps to the maximum extent feasible.
B.
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Waste Management and to the extent
economically feasible.
3.7 SCHEDULES: For specific location of insulation and thicknesses for design R- values, see Drawings.
A.
Apply insulation in the following locations: See drawings.
1. Interior surface of exterior walls, above and below grade.
2. Insulation around main drain.
3. Ceiling between joists and over air ducts.
4. Sound insulation within interior walls/ceilings of office spaces, rooms, bathrooms, and other
locations as per Drawings.
5. Unvented roof spaces.
6. Exterior above grade walls.
7. Floor headers.
END OF SECTION
07323-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 07323
STONE COATED METAL MODULAR ROOF PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Stone coated metal modular roof panels and accessories.
B.
Associated metal flashings.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Roof sheathing.
B.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood trim.
C.
Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D.
Section 07712 - Gutters and Downspouts.
E.
Division 15 - Mechanical: Mechanical work projecting through roof.
F.
Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical work projecting through roof.
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 792/A 792M - Sheet Steel, Aluminum - Zinc alloy coated by the Hot-Dip
Process, structural (physical) quality.
B.
ASTM B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.
C.
ASTM C 920 - Specification for Electrometric Joint Sealant.
D.
ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in
Roofing and Waterproofing.
E.
ASTM E 108 - Test for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Material.
F.
UL1897 Tests for wind uplift resistance of roof assemblies.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate metal panel and flashing profiles, joint locations, fastening
locations, and installation details. Indicate panel layout with location of cut and
special shapes identified.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
D.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color
chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
E.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing
actual product, color, and patterns.
F.
Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum five years documented experience producing
roofing panels of the type specified.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer certified installer specializing in performing the
work of this section.
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact until ready
for installation.
B.
Store products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.
Store products on pallets off the ground and sufficiently high to allow air
circulation beneath each bottom stack and prevent rising water from entering
pallet or stacks. Elevate one end of the pallets to ensure drainage.
2.
Prevent rain from entering pallet stacks by covering with a tarpaulin, making
provision for air circulation between draped edges of tarpaulin and ground.
3.
Prolonged storage of panels in a stack or pallet outside is not recommended
and could result in white rust or watermarks on the materials.
C.
Secure stored materials and unfinished work against damage by wind.
SEQUENCING
A.
Ensure that locating information required for installation of products of this section
are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction
progress.
B.
Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent
interruption of construction progress.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
07323-2
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide the manufacturer's 25 year limited appearance warranty and a 50 year fully
transferable, limited warranty for defects and the following.
1.
140-mph Wind Warranty
2.
Hail Impact Warranty
3.
25 year limited appearance warranty
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07323-3
B.
Provide an additional 1 percent of installed roof tiles, but not less than one full
square, for Owner's use in roof maintenance.
C.
Furnish extra materials packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels clearly describing contents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Metro Roof Products, which is located at: 3093A Industry
St. ; Oceanside, CA 92054; Toll Free Tel: 866-METRO-4U (638-7648); Tel: 760435-9842; Fax: 760-435-1162; Email: request info ([email protected]); Web:
www.smartroofs.com
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 01600.
MATERIALS - GENERAL
A.
Coated Steel: ÅSTM A 792 Grade 33 with an AZ 50 class, hot-dipped aluminum-zinc
alloy coating and a thickness of 0.017 inch (0.43 mm). Exposed surface is covered
by pressed colored stone granules embedded in an acrylic resin base coating,
followed with a clear acrylic glaze. Weight of coated steel is 1.3 psf (6.3kg m2).
B.
Panel Performance:
1.
Wind Rating: Coastal wind region to 150 mph, Florida State Approval
Appl.#FL-698 Exp.1-1-2099.
2.
ICC-ESR-#3098.
3.
CCMC-13313-R.
4.
Hail Impact: UL 2218 Class-4 rated.
5.
Color as selected by the Owner from manufacturer's standard colors.
PANELS AND ACCESSORlES
A.
MetroSHINGLE Panels: Consists of a panel with raised and lowered sections
forming a shingle appearance. Front and rear edges are formed to a ' C'
configuration, so that the panels interlock when overlapped. Panel is 10-1/2 inches
by 52 inches (267 mm by 1321 mm) with an installed exposure of 9-1/2 inches by 50
inches (241 mm by 1270 mm). Side laps are 2 inches (51 mm).
B.
Hips, Ridges and Rakes: Trim to match panel specified and of the same color and
surface finish as Metro panels.
C.
Flashing Stone-Coated: V-Bat Riser Flashing, Fascia Flashing, Head-Wall Flashing,
Z-Bar Flashing, Tile-Rake Metal Flashing and Valley Cover Flashing of same profile,
color and surface finish matching roof panels.
D.
Flashing - Painted: Provide as necessary for specific job various shaped metal
flashing sections for transition areas with construction and Stone-Coated steel roof.
E.
Nails: Corrosion resistant full round headed flathead, Ring Shank nails, 8d, 2-3/8
inch long by 0.131-inch diameter as approved by manufacturer with minimum 1,000
hours salt spray resistance to ASTM B 117.
F.
Screws: Manufacturer's #-10 by 2 inch (51 mm) long corrosion resistant steel, 1/4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07323-4
inch (6.36 mm) hex head screws. Screws colored coat to match panel color.
Capable of resisting a minimum 1,000 hours salt spray in accordance with ÅSTM B
117.
G.
Panel Fasteners: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) ring shank nails with a 3/8 inch (8 mm)
diameter head) or screws 1 inch (25 mm) long corrosion resistant steel, 1/4 inch
(6.36 mm) hex head screws. Capable of resisting a minimum 1,000 hours salt spray
in accordance with ASTM B 117.
H.
Valley and other Flashings: Aluminum zinc alloy coated sheet ASTM-A792/A792M
or G-90 Galvanized. Do not use copper and lead flashings due to metal
incompatibility.
I.
Asphalt Saturated Organic Felt: No. 30 or 43# Asphalt Saturated felt to meet
requirements of ÅSTM D 226 Type 1.
J.
Sealant: In accordance with ÅSTM C 920-86.
K.
Pipe Jack Flashings: Metro SMART-Jack 3-in-1 to fit pipes from 1-1/4 inch to 3 inch
or 3-in-4 to fit pipes from 3 inches to 4 inches. Metro SMART-Jack rubber gasket
pipe jacks stone coated to match the Metro panel finish. Fabricated of soft
aluminum. Do not use copper and lead pipe flashings due to metal incompatibility.
L.
Pipe Sleeve Covers: Metro SMART-Sleeves for pipes from 3/4 inch (19 mm) to 4
inch (100 mm) diameter and are designed for use with Metro SMART-Jack pipe
flashing and are stone coated to match the Metro panel finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify roof structure for correct framing prior to placing battens and Metro roof
panels.
C.
Verify roof penetrations and plumbing vent stacks are in place and flash to roof
surface.
D.
Verify that work requiring roof access by other trades is completed prior to starting
roofing panel installation. Limit roof access by other trades after completion of
roofing.
E.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Coordinate with installation of gutters, vents, skylights and other adjoining work to
ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and
other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and securely
fastened.
C.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
07323-5
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3
3.4
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Sheathing Installation:
1.
Apply peel and stick waterproof membrane over sheathing surface lapping
joints to slope a minimum of 6 inches.
2.
Install Drip-Edge (or Metro FL-Fascia Stone-Coated) metal around roof
perimeter, with end laps of a minimum of 4 inches, fastened per code.
3.
Install Metro Stone-Coated metal V-Bat Riser Metal on top of the drip edge
metal making sure the Metro ' Locator-Lip' detail is fitted together tightly.
Fasten per code. Stagger end joints.
4.
Fasten in place with screws or nails as specified per manufacturer's
instruction.
C.
Valley Installation:
1.
Valleys shall be installed with minimum 6-inches overlap in the direction of
flow.
2.
Fasten in place at minimum 24 inches centers through outer flange section of
valley flashing. Or use hold tabs. Fasteners shall be either sealed or have a
rubber washer head to prevent leaking.
3.
Metro Roof Products roof panels shall be cut and accurately bent down into
valley creating an open or closed valley. Panels on opposing sides of valley
shall form a straight and even line over the valley.
4.
Install new valley flashing on all re-roofing applications.
5.
Do not use copper and lead pipe flashings due to metal incompatibility.
D.
Metro Panel Installation:
1.
Install MetroSHINGLE panels using 4 fasteners across the back fastening
flange per panel.
E.
Metro Trim Installation:
1.
Place flashing and trim over locations as specified for their use by the
manufacturer.
2.
Fold exposed ends of ridges and hips neatly and cap with similar roof
material.
3.
Seal folds with sealant as required by manufacturer and secure with
additional approved fasteners.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
Stage work progress to avoid foot traffic over completed sections of roofing.
C.
Where practical provide protection of installed materials from potential damage
through work from other trades.
D.
END OF SECTION
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07464-1
SECTION 07464
VINYL SOFFITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D 4477 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Soffit.
B.
ASTM D 5206 - Standard Windload Resistance Test.
C.
ASTM E 84 - Standard test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
D.
ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
D.
Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 12
inches (300 mm) long, representing actual product, color, and patterns.
A.
1.5
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Refer to
manufacturer’s installation instructions for specific storage and handling requirements.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
Vinyl soffits.
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer's standard lifetime limited warranty on siding products, transferable to
new owners.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
VINYL SOFFITS
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.1
2.2
07464-2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: CertainTeed Corporation
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
01600.
MATERIALS
A.
Vinyl Siding, Soffit and Components: Provide products made of extruded polyvinyl chloride
as specified in this section and manufactured to comply with requirements of ASTM D 3679.
1.
Provide elongated nailing slots on nailing flanges to allow for movement.
2.
Factory-notch ends of horizontal panels to form overlapping joints.
3.
Provide products that meet weathering requirements of ASTM D 3679.
2.7 FASTENERS
A. Provide galvanized or other corrosion-resistant nails as recommended by manufacturer of siding
products.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
B.
PREPARATION
A.
Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions which would be
detrimental to proper installation.
B.
Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
3.5
Install products in accordance with the latest printed instructions of the manufacturer.
PROTECTION
A.
B.
CLEANING
A.
At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.
END OF SECTION
VINYL SOFFITS
07620-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following sheet metal flashing and trim:
1.
Formed wall flashing and trim.
B.
1.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for installing through-wall flashing and
other sheet metal flashing and trim.
2.
Division 5 Section "Architectural Joint Systems" for manufactured sheet metal expansionjoint covers.
3.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.
4.
Division 7 Section 07323 “STONE COATED METAL MODULAR ROOF PANELS” for
installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with roofing..
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and
fastener disengagement.
B.
Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to
building interior.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.
A.
Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal
flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling.
B.
Unload, store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent
bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
07620-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
1.6
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated
covering. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials
that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining
construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METALS
A.
2.2
Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet:
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;
structural quality, mill phosphatized for field painting.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal
flashing and trim installation.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal by means of plastic caps or
factory-applied coating.
2.
Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with
hex washer head.
C.
Solder for Zinc: ASTM B 32, 60 percent lead and 40 percent tin with low antimony, as
D.
Sealing Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealing tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape.
E.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type, grade, class,
and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
2.3
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and
other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items where practicable. Obtain field
measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
B.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.
07620-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
1.
Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be
seamed, form seams, and solder.
D.
Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
sealant to comply with SMACNA recommendations.
1.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet
metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated.
2.4
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1.
2.
3.2
Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely
anchored.
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
marks.
C.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and elastomeric sealant.
07620-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
D.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.
E.
Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate substrate not less than 1-1/4 inches for
nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
1.
Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners.
F.
Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required for watertight construction.
G.
Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches except where pretinned surface would show
in finished Work.
1.
2.
3.3
Do not solder prepainted, metallic-coated steel sheet.
Do not use open-flame torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow
solder into joints. Fill joints completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from
exposed surfaces.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where
possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams
that will be permanently watertight.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations
in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated.
1.
3.4
Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate
at 24-inch centers.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.
C.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces, including removing unused
fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition
during construction.
D.
Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated
beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07900-1
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
A.
Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.
B.
Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005.
B.
ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002.
C.
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005.
D.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.
E.
ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum 3 years experience.
A.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A.
Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonshrinking, noncuring.
1. Product: Equivalent to one of the following:
a. "BC-158" Butyl Rubber Sealant manufactured by Pecora Corporation:
www.pecora.com.
b. "Butyl Sealant" manufactured by Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
b. Under exterior door thresholds.
B.
General Purpose Interior Sealant: Pure acrylic latex with a silicone additive; ASTM C 834, Type
OP, Grade NF single component, paintable.
JOINT SEALERS
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.
07900-2
Color: Colors as selected.
Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
C.
Bathtub/Tile Sealant: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses M and A; single component, mildew
resistant.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.
b. Joints between countertops and wall surfaces.
D.
Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and
A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning.
1. Applications: Use for concealed locations only:
a. Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between bottom stud track
and floor.
b. Sealant bead behind suspended acoustical ceiling perimeter moldings.
E.
Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component,
neutral curing, non-sagging, non-staining, non-bleeding.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.
2.
3.
4.
Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent, minus 50 percent.
Shore A Hardness Range: 15-20.
Applications: Use for:
a. Exterior joints in vertical or overhead surfaces.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC;
oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform preparation and installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
C.
Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.
JOINT SEALERS
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
07900-3
D.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific
dimensions are indicated.
E.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H.
Tool joints concave.
END OF SECTION
JOINT SEALERS
08211-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non-rated.
A.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
B.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
C.
Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Site finishing of doors.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
AWI P-200 - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural
Woodwork Institute; 1997, Seventh Edition, Version 1.0.
B.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection
Association; 1999.
C.
NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire
Protection Association; 1999.
D.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings,
undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining
criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing.
A.
Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
Illustrated, Section 1300, Custom Grade.
B.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
section with minimum three years of documented experience.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252.
1. Listed and classified by UL as suitable to for the purpose specified and indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
B.
Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as
indicated.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1300.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in
damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and
bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to
permit ventilation.
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide warranty for the following term:
1. Exterior Doors: Five (5) years.
2. Interior Doors: Two (2) years.
C.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation
tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Veneer Doors:
1. Eggers Industries.
2. Southwood Door Company.
3. Weyerhaeuser Co.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DOOR TYPES
A.
Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction.
2.03 DOOR CORES
A.
Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: AWI Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300, Type PC - Particleboard.
B.
Fire Rated Doors: AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section
1300, Type FD, hourly ratings as indicated.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
08211-3
2.04 DOOR FACINGS
A.
Interior Doors - Veneer: White Oak species, veneer grade as specified by door quality
standard, rotary cut, with slip matched grain, for transparent finish.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for
countersink style tamper proof screws.
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.
B.
Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with UL requirements. Attach fire rating label
to door.
C.
Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement.
1. Provide solid blocking for other through-bolted hardware.
D.
Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles - Veneer Faces: Of same species as veneer facing.
E.
Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
F.
Bond edge banding to cores.
G.
Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in
accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.
H.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1600.
2.07 FINISH
A.
Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for
size or alignment.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and AWI P-200
requirements.
1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.
B.
Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
C.
Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch (19 mm).
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08211-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating
requirements.
D.
Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
E.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
F.
Coordinate installation of glazing.
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to AWI P-200 requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to AWI P-200, Section 1300 for maximum diagonal distortion.
C.
Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut
string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.
D.
Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,
edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
B.
Adjust closers for full closure.
3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
08410-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 08410
METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass and glass infill panels.
B.
Aluminum doors and frames and door hardware.
C.
Perimeter sealant.
A.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B.
Section 08800 - Glazing.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes; The Aluminum Association, Inc.;
1997, Eighth Edition.
B.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 1997.
C.
ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 1996.
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design
wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
1. Design Wind Loads: Comply with requirements of ASCE 7.
2. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with
full recovery of glazing materials.
B.
Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection
of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
C.
Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 283.
D.
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
E.
System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
F.
Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
08410-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
A.
Manufacturer and Installer: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems
with minimum three years of documented experience.
A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings which bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,
including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.
D.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Kawneer Company, Inc.; Product Trifab 451.
B.
Vistawall Architectural Products; Product Series 3000.
C.
Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
08410-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standards.
B.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep
drainage system.
1. Glazing stops: Flush.
2. Cross-Section: As indicated on drawings.
C.
Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Top Rail: 2 3/4" inches wide.
3. Vertical Stiles: 2 5/8" inches wide.
4. Bottom Rail: 4 1/2" inches wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Finish: Same as storefront.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
C.
Perimeter Sealant: Type polyurethane specified in Section 07900.
D.
Glass: As specified in Section 08800.
1. Glass in Exterior Framing: Type clear, float.
2. Glass in Doors: Type clear, float, tempered.
E.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
2.04 FINISHES
A.
Pigmented Organic Coating System: AAMA 2603; polyester or acrylic baked enamel finish;
color as selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
B.
Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.
2.05 HARDWARE
A.
Door Hardware: Storefront manufacturer's standard type to suit application.
1. Finish on Hand-Contacted Items: Polished stainless steel.
2. Include for each single door weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, butt hinges, pull
handle, closer, and thumb turn hook bolt.
2. Include for pair of doors weatherstripping, sill sweep strip, threshold, butt hinges, pull
handle, closers, head and foot bolt on one leaf and dead bolt keyed both sides.
08410-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
E.
Reinforce components internally for door hardware.
F.
Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
G.
Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work
of this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
F.
Install hardware using templates provided.
G.
Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve
performance criteria.
H.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
08410-5
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
D.
Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
E.
Protect finished work from damage.
END OF SECTION
08531-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 08531
VINYL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fixed Windows
B.
Single-Hung Side Load Windows
1.2
REFERENCES
A.
American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA)
1.
B.
1.3
ANSI/AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 /NAFS; Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl
(PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors
National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)
1.
NFRC 100; Procedure for Determining Fenestration Thermal Properties
2.
NFRC 200; Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit window manufacturer current product literature, including installation
instruction.
B.
Samples: Provide finish samples for all products.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4
A.
Deliver windows materials and components in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged
containers with identification labels intact.
B.
Store windows as recommended by manufacturer.
VINYL WINDOWS
STOKES ARCITECTURAL, INC.
08531-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer standard warranty indicating that the window unit will be free from material and
workmanship defects from the date of substantial completion for the time periods indicated
below:
1.
Window Unit: 10 years
2.
Glazing:
a.
Insulated Glass: 10 years against seal breakage
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A.
JELD-WEN Windows and Doors; 3250 Lakeport Blvd. P.O. Box 1329; Klamath Falls, OR
97601-0268,
USA;
Phone
541.885.7412,
fax
541.884.3331;
Toll
free
800.535. 3936; website www.jeld-wen.com
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section
01600..
2.2
MANUFACTURED UNITS
A.
B.
Frame
1.
Jamb Depth: 3-1/4 inch (82.5mm)
2.
Even Sight Lines: Available on horizontal sliding and single-hung side load
Sash
1.
C.
Thickness
a.
Fixed Windows: N/A
b.
Single-Hung Side Load Windows: 1 ¼”
Weatherstripping
(Awning Windows: .270 fin pile combined with foam filled bulb
D.
1.
Casement Windows: .270 fin pile combined with foam filled bulb
2.
Fixed Windows: N/A Fixed only
3.
Single-Hung Side Load Windows: .270 fin pile
Hardware:
1.
Single-Hung Side Load Windows
VINYL WINDOWS
08531-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
a.
b.
c.
E.
Balance: Block and Tackle System
Lock: Cam-Lock
Finish: Color match window frame extrusion
Glazing
1.
Strength: Annealed
2.
Insulated Glass
a.
b.
c.
d.
Two panes of glass utilizing a continuous roll formed stainless steel and dual seal
sealant.
Overall Nominal Thickness: 7/8”
Type: Type 1- Clear
Coating: Low E on surface 2
WINDOW ACCESSORIES
2.3
A.
B.
Insect Screens
1.
Material: Charcoal fiberglass screen cloth (18 by 16 mesh) set in painted roll formed
aluminum frame.
2.
Frame Finish: Color match frame extrusion
Grilles
1.
2.4
Grilles Between the Glass (GBG)
a.
Material: Made of roll formed aluminum suspended within the air cavity.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Profile: Flat
Pattern: As selected by Architect
Width: 5/8 inch
Finish: Color match window frame extrusion.
FABRICATION
A.
General:
B.
Single-Hung Side Load Windows, Fixed Windows
C.
1.
Frame: Fusion Welded Corners
2.
Sash: Fusion Welded Corners
3.
Glass: Mounted with silicone glazing compound and/or glazing tape
Fixed Windows
1.
Frame: Fusion Welded Corners
2.
Glass: Mounted with silicone glazing compound and/or glazing tape
VINYL WINDOWS
08531-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.5
FINISH
1.
Color: White.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PART 4 - GENERAL
A.
4.2
Install windows in
recommendations.
accordance
with
manufacturer’s
installation
guidelines
and
EXAMINATION
A.
Inspect window prior to installation.
B.
Inspect rough opening for compliance with window manufacturer recommendations. Verify
rough opening conditions are within recommended tolerances.
4.3
PREPARATION
A.
4.4
Prepare windows for installation in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
INSTALLATION
A.
Insert window into rough opening:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4.5
Shim side jambs straight.
Inspect window for square, level and plumb.
Fasten window through jamb, shim and into rough opening jamb.
Test and adjust for smooth operation of window.
Ensure weep holes are clear of debris for proper drainage.
CLEANING
A.
4.6
Clean the exterior surface and glass with mild soap and water.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed windows from damage.
END OF SECTION
VINYL WINDOWS
08800-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Glass.
B.
Glazing compounds and accessories.
A.
Section 07920 - Joint Sealants: Sealant and back-up material.
B.
Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors.
C.
Section 08411 - Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.
D.
Section 08520 - Aluminum Windows: Glazed windows.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.
B.
ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
C.
ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
D.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
E.
ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
F.
ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass
Units.
G.
ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed
Insulating Glass Units.
H.
GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America.
I.
GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.
J.
Florida Building Code 2001, Section 2411
GLAZING
08800-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
B.
Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air
barrier:
1.
In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
2.
To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier
and vapor retarder seal.
3.
To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly
from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting
normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with applicable code.
1.
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
2.
Thicknesses listed are minimum.
3.
Glazing products shall be capable of withstanding 400 ft-lb impact test per Florida
Building Code Section 2411.
A.
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for
glazing installation methods.
A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
B.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
compounds.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure,
interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Clear Float Glass: Clear, annealed.
1.
Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
select).
2.
1/4 inch minimum thickness.
GLAZING
08800-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
B.
Safety Glass: Clear; fully tempered.
1.
Comply with ANSI Z97.1. Glazing shall pass the test requirements of CPSC 16 CFR 1201.
2.
1/4 inch minimum thickness.
2.02 SEALED INSULATING GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Insulated Glass Units: Double pane with glass to elastomeric edge seal.
1. Place low E coating on No. 2 surface within the unit.
2. Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA.
3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
4. Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum.
B.
Insulated Tempered Glass Units: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Outer pane of 1/4 inch clear tempered glass, inner pane of clear tempered glass.
Comply with ASTM E 774 and E 773, Class CBA.
Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
Total unit thickness of 1 inch minimum.
2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Silicone Sealant: Single component; chemical curing; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C
920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use at structural and non-structural glazed applications;
cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
2.04 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet
space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,
self adhesive on one face.
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on rlease paper; size as required; black color.
D.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;
ASTM C 864 Option I; color as selected.
E.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
GLAZING
08800-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
C.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
D.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
E.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch below sight line. Seal
corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.
B.
Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full
perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.
C.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
D.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient
pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.
E.
Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops, 1/4 inch
below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.
F.
Fill gap between glazing and stop with required sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on
glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch below sight line.
G.
Apply cap bead of required sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform
line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
3.05 SCHEDULE - SEE DRAWINGS
END OF SECTION
GLAZING
09260-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
B.
1.3
Interior gypsum wallboard.
Tile backing panels.
1.
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring.
A.
Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and
identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B.
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.
Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products [by one] of the
following:
1.
Gypsum Board and Related Products:
09260-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
American Gypsum Co.
G-P Gypsum Corp.
National Gypsum Company.
United States Gypsum Co.
INTERIOR GYPSUM WALLBOARD
A.
Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and correspond with support system indicated.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard:
1.
Regular Type: ASTM C 36.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630/C 630M
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Thickness: As indicated.
Long Edges: Tapered for prefilling.
Location: As indicated
Thickness: As indicated.
Long Edges: Tapered for prefilling.
Location: As indicated.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Plastic.
Shapes:
a.
2.4
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.].
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
C.
Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat:
a.
3.
4.
Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
09260-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
5.
D.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.5
Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board:
sandable topping compounds.
Use setting-type taping and setting-type,
TEXTURE FINISHES
A.
Available Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide [one of] the following:
1.
Aggregate Finish:
a.
b.
G-P Gypsum Corp.; GyProc Vermiculite Ceiling Texture.
United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture
(Aggregated).
C.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
D.
Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray
application.
1.
Texture: Spatter knock-down.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Texture finishes: Ceilings and only walls to receive paint finish
B.
Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
C.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
D.
Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
E.
Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
09260-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
F.
3.3
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
END OF SECTION
09511-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system.
B.
Acoustical units.
C.
Supplementary acoustical insulation above ceiling.
A.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2004.
B.
ASTM C 636/C 636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels; 2006.
C.
ASTM E 580/E 580M - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint; 2006.
D.
ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 1998 (Reapproved 2005).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components and acoustical units.
B.
Samples: Submit two samples at least 4 x 8 inch in size illustrating material and finish of
acoustical units.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross
runner, and perimeter molding.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions
requiring special attention.
A.
Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the
products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
B.
Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient
heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,
tested, and approved.
B.
Install acoustical units after interior wet work is dry.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide 100 sq ft of each type of acoustical unit for Owner's use in maintenance of project.
09511-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
a. Ceramaguard, unperforated
2.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation: www.chicagometallic.com.
3. USG: www.usg.com.
B.
Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C 635; die cut and interlocking components, with stabilizer
bars, clips, splices, and perimeter moldings as required.
C.
Exposed Steel Suspension System: Formed hot-dipped galvanized steel, commercial quality cold
rolled; intermediate-duty.
1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.
2. Construction: Double web.
3. Finish: White painted.
4. Product: Equivalent to "Prelude ML" by Armstrong.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Support Channels and Hangers: Hot-dipped Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application
and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.
B.
Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.
1. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as face of grid.
C.
Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's
instructions and as supplemented in this section.
B.
Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum
deflection of 1:360.
C.
Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.
D.
Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other
work.
09511-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
E.
Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
F.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
G.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to
exceed deflection capability.
H.
Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or
support components independently.
I.
Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.
J.
Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with
other interruptions.
1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant.
2. Use longest practical lengths.
3. Overlap and rivet corners.
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS
A.
Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance
and function.
C.
Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.
D.
Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.
E.
Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.
F.
Cutting Acoustical Units:
1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.
2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.
3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.
G.
Where round obstructions and bullnose concrete block corners occur, provide preformed closures
to match perimeter molding.
H.
Lay acoustical insulation above ceiling areas where indicated.
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
B.
Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.
END OF SECTION
09651-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 09651
RESILIENT FLOOR TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Solid vinyl floor tile.
Rubber floor tile.
Vinyl composition tile (VCT).
Resilient wall base and accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
1.
1.4
Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not
less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color and pattern required.
A.
1.5
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F . Store tiles on flat surfaces.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F
or more than 95 deg F , in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
B.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
range
recommended
by
09651-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
E.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products:
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products listed in other Part 2
articles.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
2.2
COLORS AND PATTERNS
A.
2.3
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range.
VINYL COMPOSITION TILE
A.
Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
AB ColorPlus, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd..
Armstrong World Industries, Inc..
Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with Section 01600.
RESILIENT WALL BASE
A.
Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc.; <Insert product>.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO.
Johnsonite.
B.
Style: Cove.
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D.
Height: 4 inches.
E.
Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturer's standard length.
09651-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
F.
Outside Corners: Premolded.
G.
Inside Corners: Premolded.
H.
Surface: Smooth.
2.5
RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES
A.
Treads: FS RR-T-650.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
.
AFCO-USA, American Floor Products Company, Inc.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
Endura.
Estrie, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd.
Johnsonite
B.
Material: Rubber.
C.
Surface Design: Type 2 design.
1.
Type 2 Design: Raised-disc pattern.
D.
Nosing Style: Square.
E.
Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches.
F.
Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
G.
Risers: Smooth, flat, coved-toe, 7 inches high by length matching treads; produced by same
manufacturer as treads and recommended by manufacturer for installation with treads.
1.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
H.
Stringers: Of same thickness as risers, height and length after cutting to fit risers and treads
and to cover stair stringers; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended by
manufacturer for installation with treads.
I.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1.
2.6
Critical Radiant Flux Classification:
ASTM E 648.
Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
B.
Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
09651-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at
least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.
C.
3.3
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are
to be installed.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and
dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so
tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
Lay tiles square with room axis.
B.
Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
C.
Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and
nosings.
D.
Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
E.
Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
B.
Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
09651-5
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous
contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
D.
Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E.
Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces.
3.5
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
3.6
Resilient Stair Accessories:
1.
Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a.
B.
Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
1.
Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible
adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer.
Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service.
Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper
until Substantial Completion.
Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or
plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
END OF SECTION
0977-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 0977
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
1.1
A.
Section Includes: Prefinished polyester glass reinforced plastic sheets and adhered to
unfinished gypsum wallboard.
1.
PVC trim.
B.
Products Not Furnished or Installed under This Section:
1.
Gypsum substrate board.
2.
Epoxy Base.
RELATED SECTIONS
1.2
A.
Section 09260 –
Gypsum substrate board.
B.
Section 06100 - Wood Metal Stud Framing
C.
Section 09911 - Painting.
SUBMITTALS
1.3
A.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer’s standard color pattern selection samples
representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.4
A.
Deliver materials factory packaged on strong pallets.
B.
Store panels and trim lying flat, under cover and protected from the elements. Allow panels to
acclimate to room temperature (70°) for 48 hours prior to installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.5
A.
Environmental Limitations: Building are to be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient
heat (70°) and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work
B.
During installation and for not less than 48 hours before, maintain an ambient temperature and
relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of
adhesive manufacturer.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
0977-2
Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by
the adhesive manufacturer.
WARRANTY
1.6
A.
Furnish one year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
2.1
A.
Marlite; 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. 800-377-1221 FAX (330) 343-4668 Email:
[email protected] www.marlite.com.
1.
B.
Product:
1.
Standard FRP
PANELS
2.2
A.
Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D 5319.
1.
Coating: Multi-layer print, primer and finish coats or applied over-layer.
2.
Dimensions:
a.
Thickness – 0.090 inch nominal
b.
Width - 4'-0” nominal
c.
Length – As indicated on the drawings.
3.
Tolerance:
a.
Length and Width: +/-1/8 inch
b.
Square - Not to exceed 1/8 inch for 5/32 inch for 10 foot panels
B.
Back Surface: Smooth. Imperfections which do not affect functional properties are not cause
for rejection.
C.
Front Finish: In accordance with approved sample.
a.
Color: As selected by Owner
MOLDINGS
2.3
A.
PVC:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Extruded PVC Trim Profiles for .090 inch thick panels.
M 350 Inside Corner
M 360 Outside Corner
M 365 Division
M 370 Edge
Color: As selected by Owner
B.
Outside Corner Guard:
1.
M 961 PVC
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
0977-3
ACCESSORIES
2.4
A.
Fasteners: Non-staining nylon drive rivets.
1.
Match panel colors.
2.
Length to suit project conditions.
B.
Adhesive: Either of the following construction adhesives complying with ASTM C 557.
1.
Marlite C-551 FRP Adhesive - Water- resistant, non-flammable adhesive
2.
Marlite C-375 Construction adhesive flexible, water-resistant, solvent based adhesive
formulated for fast, easy application.
C.
Sealant:
1.
Marlite Brand MS-250 Clear Silicone Sealant
2.
Marlite Brand MS-251 White Silicone Sealant
.
3.
Marlite Brand - Color Match Sealant,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION
3.1
A.
Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are
smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails countersunk, joints and cracks filled
flush and smooth with the adjoining surface.
1.
Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24 inch (61cm) on-center.
B.
Repair defects prior to installation.
1.
Level wall surfaces to panel manufacturer’s requirements. Remove protrusions and fill
indentations.
INSTALLATION
3.2
A.
Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence.
B.
Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1/8” inch (3 mm) clearance for every 8 foot (2.43m) of
panel.
1.
Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with shears.
2.
Pre-drill fastener holes 1/8 inch (3.175mm) oversize with high speed drill bit.
a.
Space at 8 inches (20.32cm) maximum on center at perimeter, approximately 1
inch from panel edge.
b.
Space at in field in rows 16 inches (40.64cm) on center, with fasteners spaced at
12 inches (30.48 cm) maximum on center.
C.
Apply panels to board substrate, above base, vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern
aligned with adjoining panels.
1.
Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.
a.
Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturer’s
recommendations.
b.
Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over-tighten.
D.
Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required
clearances.
0977-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
1.
2.
All moldings must provide for a minimum 1/8 inch (3.18mm) of panel expansion at joints
and edges, to insure proper installation.
Apply sealant to all moldings, channels and joints between the system and different
materials to assure watertight installation.
CLEANING
3.3
A.
Remove excess sealant from panels and moldings. Wipe panel down using a damp cloth and
mild soap solution or cleaner.
B.
Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners.
END OF SECTION
09911-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 09911
PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior and interior
items and surfaces.
1.
B.
Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material
is not to be painted. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or
surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated,
Owner will select from standard colors and finishes available.
1.
C.
Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including
color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and
electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish.
Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,
and labels.
1.
Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components:
a.
b.
2.
Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a.
3.
Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
Light fixtures.
Anodized aluminum.
Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Valve and damper operators.
Linkages.
Sensing devices.
Motor and fan shafts.
PAINTING
09911-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
4.
1.3
Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat material indicated.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings
similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label.
B.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum
ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
are between 50 and 90 deg F.
B.
Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding
air are between 45 and 95 deg F.
C.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or
at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.
Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Products:
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles.
PAINTING
09911-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
C.
Manufacturers' Names:
Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints).
Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams)
PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are
compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B.
Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types
specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application
indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
1.
C.
Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer:
application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material
data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions.
Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior
Benjamin Moore; IronClad Latex Low-Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel No. 363: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM
Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate.
Sherwin-Williams; Galvite HS Paint B50WZ3: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 2.0 mils.
INTERIOR PRIMERS
A.
Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Benjamin Moore; Regal FirstCoat Interior Latex Primer & Underbody No. 216: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry
film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils.
Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Masonry Primer B28W300 Series: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 3.0 mils.
Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semigloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes:
formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.
1.
Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody No. 217:
thickness of not less than 4 mils.
PAINTING
Factory-
Applied at a dry film
09911-4
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.
3.
C.
Interior Wood Primer for Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes:
acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.0 mil.
Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry
Factory-formulated alkyd- or
Benjamin Moore; Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody No. 217: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
Pittsburgh Paints; 6-6 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater: Applied at
a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry
EXTERIOR FINISH COATS
A.
Exterior Flat Acrylic Paint:
application.
1.
2.
3.
Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for exterior
Benjamin Moore; MoorLife Latex House Paint No. 105: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.5 mils.
Pittsburgh Paints; 72 Line Sun-Proof Exterior Flat Latex House Paint: Applied at a dry
Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Exterior Latex Flat House and Trim Paint, A80 Series:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils.
2.5
INTERIOR FINISH COATS
2.6
Retain finish-coat materials below for a flat acrylic finish over interior concrete, stucco, masonry,
concrete masonry units, mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels, gypsum board, plaster,
acoustic plaster, and ferrous and zinc-coated metal.
A.
Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Benjamin Moore; Moore's Regal AquaVelvet No. 319: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.4 mils.
Pittsburgh Paints; 89-Line Manor Hall Interior Eggshell Wall and Trim: Applied at a dry
Sherwin-Williams; SuperPaint Interior Latex Satin Wall Paint A87 Series: Applied at a dry
Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel.
1.
2.
3.
Benjamin Moore; Impervex Enamel No. 309: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 1.2 mils.
Pittsburgh Paints; 51 Line Brilliant Reflections Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel:
Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils.
Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel B21W201: Applied at a dry
PAINTING
09911-5
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
2.7
INTERIOR WOOD STAINS AND VARNISHES
A.
Open-Grain Wood Filler: Factory-formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate
1.
2.
3.
B.
Interior Wood Stain: Factory-formulated alkyd-based penetrating wood stain for interior
application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.
Benjamin Moore; Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick-Dry Sanding Sealer No. 413.
Pittsburgh Paints; 6-10 SpeedHide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer and
Finish.
Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26V43.
Interior Alkyd- or Polyurethane-Based Clear Satin Varnish:
polyurethane-based clear varnish.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234.
Pittsburgh Paints; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi-Transparent Oil Stain.
Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Interior Oil Stain A-48 Series.
Clear Sanding Sealer: Factory-formulated fast-drying alkyd-based clear wood sealer applied at
spreading rate recommended by manufacturer.
1.
2.
D.
Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler No. 238.
Pittsburgh Paints; none required.
Sherwin-Williams; Sher-Wood Fast-Dry Filler.
Factory-formulated alkyd- or
Benjamin Moore; Benwood Interior Wood Finishes Polyurethane Finishes Low Lustre
No. 435.
Pittsburgh Paints; 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear.
Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Fast Dry Oil Varnish, Satin A66-300 Series.
Paste Wax: As recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4.
1.
2.
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected
and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
within a particular area.
PAINTING
09911-6
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
B.
3.2
Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting
fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical
or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1.
B.
Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances
that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
1.
C.
After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using
workers skilled in the trades involved.
Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's
written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.
1.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2.
Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral
spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
D.
Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white
shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,
fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,
ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters,
cases, and paneling.
If transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall
construction occurs on back side.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of
varnish or sealer immediately on delivery.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
Material Preparation:
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written
Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface
film and strain material before using.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
PAINTING
09911-7
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
E.
Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple
coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
F.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scu les. ffed surfaces, or conditions
detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
2.
Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
3.
The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures,
grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in
place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and
provide desired protection.
4.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
5.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through
registers or grilles.
6.
Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
surfaces.
7.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.
8.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B.
Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate
size for surface or item being painted.
Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by
manufacturer for material and texture required.
C.
Minimum Coating Thickness:
Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by
manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime
coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other
defects due to insufficient sealing.
E.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,
holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
PAINTING
09911-8
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
F.
Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of
even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks,
orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
1.
Provide satin finish for final coats.
G.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no
evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
H.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,
or repaint work not complying with requirements.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded
paint materials from Project site.
1.
3.5
After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished
surfaces.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting.
Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting
operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
1.
3.6
After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted
surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
Mineral-Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels: Provide the following finish systems over exterior,
mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panels:
1.
B.
Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over pre-primed surface.
a.
Finish Coats: Exterior flat acrylic paint.
Zinc-Coated Metal:
surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
a.
b.
3.7
Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated metal
Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer.
Finish Coat: Exterior low-luster acrylic paint.
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
PAINTING
09911-9
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
A.
Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
3.
Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel.
Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a.
b.
3.8
Finish Coats: Interior low-luster acrylic enamel.
Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss alkyd enamel for gypsum board and plaster.
INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE
A.
Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new interior woodwork:
1.
Alkyd-Based Stain Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin
varnish over a sealer coat and interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Filler Coat: Open-grain wood filler.
Stain Coat: Interior wood stain.
Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer.
Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish.
END OF SECTION
PAINTING
10441-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 10441
PLASTIC SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Engraved plastic signs.
B.
Cash allowance for signs.
1.02 ALLOWANCES
A.
See Section 01210 - Allowances, for cash allowances affecting this section.
B.
Allowance includes purchase and delivery of plastic signs; installation is included in this section
and is part of the Contract Sum.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
Facilities; International Code Council; 1998.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate sign styles, lettering font, foreground and background colors,
locations, overall dimensions of each sign.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation template and attachment devices.
A.
Package signs, labeled in name groups.
B.
Store adhesive attachment tape at ambient room temperatures.
A.
Do not install signs when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Plastic Signs:
1. Best Manufacturing Co: www.bestsigns.com.
2. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.
3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
2.02 ENGRAVED SIGNS
A.
Engraved Signs: Laminated colored plastic; lettering engraved through face to expose core
color:
1. Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/ICC A117.1, including Braille.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
PLASTIC SIGNS
10441-2
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install signs after doors are finished, in locations indicated.
C.
Center signs on door surface, level.
END OF SECTION
PLASTIC SIGNS
10800-1
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
SECTION 10800
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Accessories for toilet rooms.
B.
Grab bars.
A.
Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Concealed supports for accessories, including in wall framing
and plates.
B.
Section 10165 - Plastic Laminate Toilet Compartments.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM A 269 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service; 2002a.
B.
ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2002a.
C.
ASTM B 456 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus
Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium; 1995.
D.
ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001.
E.
GSA CID A-A-3002 - Mirrors, Glass; U.S. General Services Administration; 1996.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function,
attachment methods.
1.05 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to receive anchor
attachments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Toilet Accessories:
1. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc: www.bobrick.com.
3. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com.
4. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.
B.
All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
10800-2
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete
with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
1. Grind welded joints smooth.
2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with
G90/Z275 coating.
C.
Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C 1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, copper
coating, and suitable protective organic coating to copper backing in accordance with GSA CID
A-A-3002.
D.
Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof.
E.
Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.
F.
Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for
component and substrate.
2.03 FINISHES
A.
Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.
C.
Baked Enamel: Pretreat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats
epoxy baked enamel.
2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy
brackets.
B.
Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel;
seamless wall flanges, continuous piano hinges, tumbler locks on upper and lower doors.
1. Waste receptacle liner: Reusable, heavy-duty vinyl.
2. Towel dispenser capacity: 400 C-fold.
3. Waste receptacle capacity: 4 gallons.
C.
Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck-mounted on vanity, with polyethylene container
concealed below deck; piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish;
chrome-plated deck escutcheon.
D.
Mirrors: Stainless steel framed, 6 mm thick float glass mirror.
1. Backing: Full-mirror sized, minimum 0.03 inch galvanized steel sheet and nonabsorptive
filler material.
2. Fixed Tilt Mirrors: Minimum 3 inches tilt from top to bottom.
E.
Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness,
nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between
wall and inside of grab bar.
1. Length and configuration: As indicated on drawings.
F.
Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Stainless steel, surface-mounted, self-closing door, locking
bottom panel with full-length stainless steel piano-type hinge, removable receptacle.
10800-3
CRESTVIEW, FLORIDA
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
B.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C.
Mounting Heights and Locations: as indicated on drawings
END OF SECTION
Okaloosa Animal Clinic – Crestview, FL
Johnson, Peaden Engineering, Inc. - #1202
15100-1
Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
SECTION 15100
HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR CONDITIONING
1.01
GENERAL PROVISIONS: The general conditions, supplementary conditions, and requirements
of Section 1, General Requirements, of these specifications apply to work of this Section,
including required "As-Built" drawings. Complete compliance with all provisions contained therein
which affect work or requirements of this Section is mandatory.
1.02
SCOPE OF WORK: The work included under this Section of the specifications consists of
providing all materials, labor and incidentals necessary to install and make ready for operation
complete systems of air conditioning, heating and ventilating for the proposed construction. In
general, the work shall include but may not necessarily be limited to the following major
subdivisions.
A. Provide heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems complete with heating and air
conditioning unit(s), piping, coils, fans, filters, insulation, controls, accessories, etc., as shown
on plans.
B. Provide air distribution systems for conditioned air from air conditioning units including
ductwork, insulation, grilles and diffusers, etc., as shown on plans.
C. Provide exhaust fans, intakes, exhaust and relief vents, louvers, and accessories for
ventilation systems.
D. Provide control and instrumentation for all equipment and systems where indicated and/or as
required.
E. Provide all materials required for a proper installation even if specific mention of all items is
not made.
1.03
RESPONSIBILITY OF BIDDERS:
A. Before submitting proposals, each bidder shall examine all drawings and specifications for
this project and shall examine the site of work. He shall be fully informed as to character
of the work and with that of other trades. No considerations will be given at a later date for
alleged misunderstandings as to requirements of work, materials to be furnished, or
conditions required by nature of the site.
This shall include the complete requirements for the installation of all equipment he furnishes.
If that equipment requires services other than those shown in this set of plans, this Contractor
will have the full responsibility to provide those services at his expense.
B. Where the Contractor finds the specifications and/or plans to be in conflict, error, or not clear,
same shall be brought to the attention of the Architect PRIOR TO SUBMITTING A BID.
1.04
PERMITS, CODES AND REGULATIONS:
A. Requirements of all codes and regulations referenced herein, and all applicable regulations in
effect the site, shall be met. All permits and fees required shall be obtained by the Contractor
at his own expense.
B. If any part of the work as shown or specified is found not to be in accordance with any
applicable code or legal requirement, the Architect shall be notified before the time of bidding.
All work in this section shall comply with latest issue of the listed Rules and Codes. When
more than one Rule or Code applies, the most stringent shall be complied with.
Issued: November 2012
15100-2
(1) 2010 Florida Building Code - Building.
(2) NFPA 90A
(3) 2010 Florida Building Code - Mechanical.
(4) 2010 Florida Energy Efficiency Code.
(5) NFPA 90B
(6) NFPA 101
C. All equipment provided by this section which has electrical connections, internal wiring,
motors, starters, contactors, heaters, or other electrical apparatus as a part of the equipment
shall bear a U.L. seal of approval or a seal of approval by an approved equal testing
laboratory. All materials and equipment shall be domestic, "Made in the U.S.A.".
1.05
SUBDIVISION OF WORK: Each subdivision of work includes furnishing and installing all
materials to make that part of work complete, and shall consist of all auxiliaries, setting of
equipment and sleeves through building construction where required, all in complete coordination
and in cooperation with other trades. It is contemplated that all subdivisions of work when
complete will form heating, air conditioning, and ventilating systems for the entire work.
1.06
QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTORS: The Air Conditioning and Heating Contractor shall
have personally supervised installation of at least three (3) air conditioning systems whose total
plant was at least equal to this system. Systems shall be at least three (3) years old. Contractor
shall have a full time service department engaged in servicing all types of work in this Contract.
Any Contractor who cannot meet the above requirements shall have written prior approval to Bid
the project. Contractor must be properly licensed and established as a Heating and Air
Conditioning Contractor and shall maintain adequate service facilities within 50 miles of project
site.
1.07
CUTTING AND PATCHING: Contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the
installation of this work. No cutting, drilling or insertion of sleeves which may weaken a structural
member shall be done without consent of the Architect. Finished floor, walls, and ceilings shall
not be broken without consent of the Architect. Patching and repairs shall be made by the
affected trade at the responsibility and cost of this Contractor.
1.08
PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION:
A. Equipment, controls and trim shall be protected against damage or injury due to building
materials, acid, tools, equipment, or any cause incidental to construction. All equipment
damaged by any cause shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.
B. All pipe openings shall be closed with plugs and caps during construction. The plugs or caps
shall be installed when the pipe is roughed in and shall not be removed until final connection
is made. Plugs or caps shall be substantial enough to withstand the test pressure specified
herein.
1.09
QUALITY OF MATERIALS:
A. All storage of materials shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. Do not install any item or
materials which has been weather damaged.
B. Materials which would suffer any damage from exposure to any possible kind of weather shall
15100-3
NOT be stored in the open, regardless of temporary or shipping protection that might be
provided.
C. All finished items and all machinery type items (such as: air handling units, air control
devices, unprotected miscellaneous items, fans, pumps, etc.) shall be stored in permanent
buildings for weather protection. Only those items specifically designed for outside
installation may be stored outside (such as air-cooled condensing units).
D. Do not ship any materials which require protection from the weather to the job site until
building is ready for installation of same.
1.10
DRAWINGS:
A. The drawings complementing this section of this specification are diagrammatic. The
Contractor shall make field measurements at the site during construction and install the
systems, as the work progresses, in such a manner that the equipment, piping, vents,
conduit, lights, panels, and ductwork will fit into the space provided, allow adequate
headroom, and if in finished areas, be as neatly installed, as obscure, and "out-of-the-way" as
physically possible.
B. Before the Contractor submits for approval any items of equipment, he shall determine
whether or not it will fit in the space provided. If, after installation of any equipment, piping, or
other items, it is determined that ample maintenance or passage space has not been
provided, the Contractor shall rearrange his work/or furnish other equipment, irrespective of
previous shop drawing approval.
C. Due to difference between various manufacturers, it is not practicable to show exact
dimensions of units, nor to show or specify all minor details of equipment. Contractor shall
provide all valves, fittings, and accessories as necessary for a complete installation, whether
or not each item is individually specified or detailed.
D. Conduit, switches, controls, tubing or other apparatus shall not be fastened to or supported
from or on the A.C. unit casings, fan housings, etc.
E. Equipment operated in excess of the recommended and published ratings of the
manufacturer will not be acceptable. All items of equipment in the same category (that is,
A.C. equipment, exhaust equipment, heating equipment, controls, etc.) shall be produced by
one equipment manufacturer, and if interconnected, shall be match rated as standard catalog
items or systems. All equipment shall be standard catalog items and shall be domestic, made
in the U.S.A.
1.11
SHOP DRAWINGS:
A. Approval of the shop drawings as submitted does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to comply with the Contract Documents. It is the responsibility of the
contractor to submit all HVAC submittals with loads calculated at the entering
conditions specified on the drawings. Failure to comply will result in immediate
rejection without further review.
B. Any deviation from the Contract Documents shall be specifically noted in the submittals in a
manner which will call attention of the Architect to the deviation. If there is no specific
approval for the deviation in writing by the Architect, the Contractor shall comply with the
Contract Documents.
C. Shop drawings shall be submitted for all mechanical items, pipe, insulation, duct material,
15100-4
and similar items. Seven sets of shop drawings shall be submitted for each item. Approval
shall be obtained before any equipment is installed. Shop drawings approval is not intended
to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for dimensional coordination, quantities, capacity
guarantees, electrical coordination, correct voltage characteristics on all equipment, and full
compliance with the Contract Documents. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time.
Drawings, data sheets, curves, tables, etc., shall indicate complete compliance with the
specifications, with each particular item noted on sheets which have more than one item
listed.
D. A copy of the equipment purchasing order to the manufacturer shall be included which
delineates each separate item of equipment and its mark or tag number for identification. If
catalogs or catalog sheets are included, each item shall be noted with that same identifying
mark.
E. Equipment control drawings by the manufacturer - actual not typical - shall accompany the
equipment submittals on all items with internal controls such as package equipment. Failure
to do so will result in equipment disapproval.
F. Shop drawings of 1/4" scale minimum shall be drawn and submitted for all equipment rooms
showing all mechanical equipment, ductwork, piping, and any other equipment or
miscellaneous items which may affect the accessibility or installation (removal) of the
equipment such as conduit, piping, plumbing, and structure. This includes all equipment
rooms. Provide reproducibles for this submittal.
G. Submit 1/4" minimum scale shop drawings showing all ductwork (supply, return, exhaust,
outside air) and any other items which may affect the location, size and accessibility of the
ductwork, such as structure, piping, plumbing, and electrical. Drawings shall be dimensioned
shop fabrication drawings. No ductwork shall be fabricated without approved drawings.
Equipment room layouts and ductwork shall be submitted after equipment approval. Provide
sepias for this submittal.
H. Upon completion of work, this Contractor shall provide "As-Built" drawings to the Architect
showing the complete system as installed. Any deviations from the contract documents shall
be clouded and noted with a revision mark and date approved by Architect. These drawings
shall be submitted to the Architect and the Engineer on a CD in AutoCAD drawing format.
1.12
WORK INCLUDED: The following items of materials and labor incidental to or related to the work
will be provided by the General Contractor.
A. Openings in the building structure for location of pipes, air ducts, etc. The location and size
of all openings is the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor.
B. Furring around pipes, ducts, etc., except as shown and detailed.
C. Openings for outside air intakes and for exhaust outlets, etc., including flashing of roof
structure.
D. Electrical power wiring to the extent as shown on the electrical plans will be by the Electrical
Section.
E. Patching, refinishing, and repairing such as patching and finishing at duct openings, pipe
openings, ceiling and/or roof penetrations, etc. Any ceilings, walls, or floor, cut or damaged
by this Contractor shall be refinished to new conditions.
F. All openings, closings, flashings, etc., shall be the responsibility of both the HVAC Contractor
15100-5
and the General Contractor.
1.13
FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS: All special foundations and supports which are separate and
distinct from building construction as shown by architectural drawings and which are required for
equipment provided in this section shall be furnished as work of this section. Equipment located
in equipment rooms shall be mounted on concrete pads and on isolation spring mounts selected
to match equipment loads. Suspended equipment shall be supported with straps as specified in
26.B(8) or heavier rods and angles, bolted to structure as required.
Wire shall not be used.
Beam clamps (or screw clamps) shall not be used to support equipment which has rotative
(vibration generating) capabilities. All supports are subject to approval.
1.14
SAFETY PROVISIONS: Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys, and
other rotating parts located so that any person may come in close proximity thereto, shall be fully
enclosed or properly guarded in a manner approved by the Architect and/or as required by codes.
1.15
PAINTING: All equipment furnished shall be rendered free from grease, plaster, etc., and should
any equipment with factory finish be scratched, the blemish shall be touched-up with the
equipment manufacturer's touch-up paint. All unprotected pipe, hangers, supports, etc., shall be
painted with rust resistant primer and two finish coats of enamel. All exposed piping, ductwork,
insulation, etc., shall be finished painted, color as selected by the Architect.
1.16
NOISE AND VIBRATION:
A. This Contractor shall be held responsible for elimination of all noise or vibration transmitted to
occupied areas from equipment which he may install. This applies particularly to air-borne
noises in ductwork, vibration, and noises in piping, water hammer, and vibration from
mechanical equipment transmitted through bases to building structure. This Contractor shall
furnish and install all anti-vibration bases, flexible connectors for ducts and piping, acoustic
liners, etc., as may be necessary. Each air handling unit, pump, compressor, etc., shall be
supported on properly selected "spring and rubber- in-shear" combination type isolators. All
isolators shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be selected and submitted by that
manufacturer or his direct representative.
B. All mechanical equipment shall be isolated in accordance with Table 34, Chapter 42, in the
1991 ASHRAE Handbook, HVAC APPLICATIONS volume. Piping and high pressure
ductwork in the mechanical room and for the first three (3) support points remotely located
away from mechanical equipment shall be isolated with Type 3 Isolators with a minimum
deflection of 1.0 inches. Isolators for equipment on grade shall be selected from the "20' Floor
Span" column. Isolators for upper floor equipment shall be selected from the "30' Floor Span"
column unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
C. The sound level in the finished spaces which is attributable to the work of this section is the
complete responsibility of this Contractor. He shall provide products, materials, and
installation to achieve sound levels as prescribed in 19-26. Special attention shall be given to
duct lining materials, balancing dampers, air distribution products, fans, motors, and any
other items affecting the generation and/or transmission of sound to the finished spaces.
1.17
DRAIN CONNECTIONS: This Contractor shall make drain connections from the air conditioning
units. Only open sight drain connections will be approved. Drain from air conditioning units shall
be trapped (minimum 4" water seal) to prevent air from entering units through drains. All
condensate drain materials shall be Type L copper. Size shall be full size of drain connections or
as shown on the drawings. Final connection shall be union.
1.18
ELECTRICAL WORK:
A. All motors, starters, control devices and control wiring appurtenant to and required for the
15100-6
operation of the equipment furnished shall be provided as work of this section.
B. Electric power for motors shall be as shown on electrical drawings. The Contractor shall
verify from the electrical drawings the voltage characteristics for each motor, and it shall be
his total responsibility to provide all equipment in the correct voltage characteristics as
required to suit the available electrical current.
C. Motors shall be furnished in sizes as required by Contractor's equipment, but in no case less
than sizes specified herein or on the drawings. Contractor shall verify that disconnects and
electrical power circuits to equipment are adequately sized for equipment furnished and shall
notify Architect if other requirements are necessary. Contractor shall bear the cost of
increasing sizes if equipment furnished has electrical requirements greater than those shown
on the electrical drawings.
D. Furnish and install all controls and interlock wiring, conduit, and accessories necessary to
make a complete installation. All control wiring shall be in conduit and shall comply with
SECTION: ELECTRICAL.
E. This Contractor shall furnish any additional power wiring, disconnects, breakers, etc., as
required by his equipment that is not shown on the electrical plans.
F. Starters, disconnects, breakers, contactors, switches, relays, and other control devices shall
be labeled. Those not so covered by the Control Section of this specification shall be labeled
in accordance with the SECTION: ELECTRICAL.
1.19
MOTORS AND STARTERS:
A. All starting or control devices, including manual switches, manual starters, magnetic starters,
two-speed starters, etc., for equipment by this section shall be furnished by this section.
Breakers or disconnects shall not be used as the starting device for any motor or electrical
device. Motors and starting equipment shall conform to the requirements of the local utility
company. Where motors are used with drives requiring adjustment, they shall be provided
with slide rails. The load to which each motor is connected shall not cause the running
current to exceed the nameplate amperage.
B. Disconnects or breakers and power wiring circuits shall be furnished by the SECTION:
ELECTRICAL or as shown on the electrical drawings. If any additional equipment is required
of any increased size is needed to meet the requirements of equipment furnished by this
section, the cost shall be borne by the Mechanical Contractor.
C. Provide magnetic starters for all motors of 1/2 HP or larger (normally three phase). Smaller
motors shall have manual starters or contactors and may have integral protection. All single
phase motors shall be permanent split capacitor type. All motors shall be overload protected.
D. Magnetic starters shall be Allen-Bradley, Square D, or Cutler-Hammer. Provide complete
with three leg protection, H.O.A. switch and pilot light in cover, 120 volt coils, integral
transformer for control circuit, extra N.O. and N.C. contacts as required for control and
interlock. When starter cover is opened, all wiring (above 24 volts) within, including control
wiring, shall be disconnected. Provide overload heater elements in all starters sized at 1.15
times full load amps of motor.
E. Any motor that creates excessive noise in the opinion of the Architect shall be replaced with a
motor that does not create a problem. This shall also apply to motors and their frequency
controllers.
1.20
GUARANTEE:
15100-7
A. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment, materials and workmanship for one year from date
of substantial completion, or acceptance by the Architect. He shall replace or repair, to the
satisfaction of the Architect, any part which proved defective during guarantee period. He
shall provide full 100% maintenance for the first year, including filters and monthly
inspections for preventative maintenance.
B. Contractor shall furnish first charges of refrigerant, grease, oils, etc., and shall be responsible
for such full charges for the guarantee period, except when loss is due to fault or negligence
of the Owner.
C. Contractor shall guarantee that individual pieces of equipment furnished shall have equal or
greater capacity than specified herein.
1.21
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA:
A. After completion of his work, and when the building is ready for occupancy, this Contractor
shall operate the system for a minimum period of three (3) days, during which time test and
balance data may be gathered. The Contractor shall adjust outlets, controls, etc., and shall
instruct the Owner's personnel in the correct operation of the equipment. Contractor shall
submit a statement, signed by the Owner's personnel, stating that operating instructions have
been received.
B. Furnish three (3) bound sets of operating and maintenance instructions, parts data, control
diagram, a copy of all submittal data, etc., covering each and every item installed under this
contract. Submit to Architect for approval prior to final inspection.
1.22
TEST AND BALANCE:
A. Bids:
(1) Quotations for this work shall be submitted to Stokes Architectural, 9 Miracle Strip Pkwy
SW, Fort Walton Beach, FL 32548, with copies to the Architect (Engineer) at the time of,
or up to 45 days after the project bid date. Quotation shall be ". . . in accordance with
plans and specifications" including "CERTIFICATION" as specified. Bids not made in the
above context will not be acceptable. Outside of envelope shall be marked for
identification as a "BID FOR PROJECT: Okaloosa Animal Clinic".
B. Preparation and Assistance:
(1) The required testing and balancing shall be performed by a Test and Balance Agency as
SPECIFIED HERE-IN and under direct supervision of the Architect. The services of the
"Test and Balance" (here-in-after called "T&B") Agency will be contracted for and paid for
by the Mechanical Contractor.
(2) The Mechanical Contractor shall work with and cooperate with the T&B Agency in such a
manner that the T&B work may be accomplished in an orderly manner as expeditiously
as possible. He shall perform any and all manners of preparation work as directed by the
T&B Agency and/or the Architect to prepare the job ready for the T&B Agency. This shall
include the furnishing of extra tall ladders, scaffolds, etc., and required tools not normally
hauled on a service truck. The Test and Balance Agency shall perform only adjustment
type work.
(3) The Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following preparatory work (as a minimum)
before notifying the Test and Balance Agency that the system is ready for test and
balance.
15100-8
(a) Proper filters installed in all air handling units before fan operation.
(b) All fans operating, rotation correct, amps and overloads checked and satisfactory.
Set fan RPM per specifications.
(c) All exhaust fans operating, interlocks checked, rotation, amps, and overloads
checked.
(d) All manual dampers checked for full operation, all manual dampers full open
including outlet dampers. All automatic dampers same as manual.
(e) All cooling and heating equipment including heat pump units, etc., capable of full
operation, all motors checked for amps, overloads, and rotation.
(f) All controls checked for proper operation.
(g) All systems fully operating in the seasonal mode as required by the weather.
(h) The Mechanical Contractor shall notify the Architect ten (10) days before time, when
the job will be ready for test and balance, that is, when all systems are operating,
fans running, controls checked out, etc., as specified above.
(4) Should the Test and Balance Agency be notified that the system has been properly
prepared and the test and balance work commenced and the systems are found to NOT
be in readiness or if a dispute occurs as to the readiness of the systems, the Test and
Balance Agency shall request an inspection be made by a duly appointed representative
of the Owner, Architect, Test and Balance Agency, and the Contractor. This inspection
shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented parties whether or not the system
meets the readiness requirements for test and balance services. Should the inspection
reveal the test and balance services notification to have been premature, all costs of the
mis-spent services by the test and balance firm shall be paid for by the Mechanical
Contractor. See also paragraph C(2) regarding Contractor's responsibility for sound
testing.
(5) Duct leak testing is included in the T&B work. However, if the duct has sufficient leakage
so as to require additional testing, the costs of the retesting including travel costs, travel
time, and testing time shall be paid for by the Mechanical Contractor.
(6) The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for installing any additional aids for
balancing as specified in paragraphs C(5)c and C(7)o. It shall also be his responsibility
to install the entire mechanical system(s) in such a manner that the T&B work may be
accomplished with minimum amount of effort.
(7) Upon notification as to the date of arrival of the T&B mechanic, the Mechanical
Contractor and the controls sub-contractor shall have their installers on the job to assist
in the T&B work. The installing mechanics shall stay with and assist the T&B work
mechanic in any manner as directed by the T&B mechanic, for the full T&B period,
including the furnishing of equipment for access to high vertical equipment or outlets
(such as tall ladders, etc.).
(8) The manner in which the T&B work is purchased shall not relieve the Mechanical
Contractor of any of the responsibility which would be his if he were purchasing the T&B
work.
C. Test and Balance Work:
15100-9
(1) Test and balance work shall be performed by a Test and Balance Agency, which is
engaged solely in full-time test and balance work, is a member of the American Air
Balance Council (AABC) or approved equal, and includes a registered (Alabama)
Professional Engineer in the responsible position. Membership in any trade group such
as AABC does not automatically qualify the "T&B" Agency for approval.
(2) Test and balance shall be performed in accordance with the AABC Standards. This shall
include verification testing for air quantity, temperature control, water quantity, vibration
and sound control, and all items as recommended in "National Standards" by Associated
Air Balance Council, 1982 Edition, with special attention to sound testing as listed in
Chapter 23.3. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for all expenses incurred
for testing beyond a second test. The Test and Balance Agency shall provide the
Contractor any assistance he needs in identifying items or portions of the installation that
need correction.
(3) Contract to the Test and Balance Agency shall be issued by the Owner (Architect).
Copies of the contract and all correspondence will then be forwarded to the General
Contractor and the Mechanical Contractor. The Test and Balance Agency shall be
directly responsible to the Architect. All correspondence (reports, letters, and
communications) between any parties shall have copies sent directly to the Architect, the
General Contractor, and the Mechanical Contractor.
(4) System shall be checked for full performance during both heating and cooling seasons.
See paragraph C(7)o.
(5) In Progress Inspections: The Test and Balance Agency shall be furnished with plans and
specifications by the Mechanical Contractor as soon as contract is awarded.
(a) Plans and specifications shall be reviewed and if any discrepancies are noted which
would hinder balancing, the Architect shall be notified.
(b) Inspections of the job shall be made during construction for proper installation of the
system(s) and of balancing aids in the system(s). Any discrepancies noted shall be
brought to the attention of all parties concerned. The number of inspections shall
vary with the size and complexity of the job and shall be adequate for the purpose
intended. Report all job visits in writing - MANDATORY.
(c) Any balancing aids or devices such as adjustable drives, volume dampers, splitter
dampers, thermometer wells, flow control devices, gauge ports, air turning devices,
etc., that the Test and Balance Agency deems necessary and which are in addition to
those provided by the plans and specifications, shall be provided by the Mechanical
Contractor at no increased cost.
(d) Ductwork shall be tested for leakage by comparing main trunk quantity with outlet
summation. Maximum 5% allowed on low pressure systems.
(6) Certification Report: The Contractor shall prepare the final test and balance certification
report in the following format and it shall contain the following items:
(a) Report shall be in bound booklet form, 8-1/2" x 11", with substantial backs, using
forms recommended and approved by the AABC, all printing and writing to be in
black ink and printed on one side of the paper only.
(b) Pages shall be numbered consecutively throughout the report, number in lower right
hand corner. Table of contents to list each page in numerical order with contents of
15100-10
that page only.
(c) Any blanks in the forms (information missing) shall be fully explained.
(d) If all information cannot be obtained due to seasonal condition, the entire report will
be reissued with the additional information whenever same is obtained.
(e) Reports shall contain a form letter addressed to the Test and Balance Agency
requesting the additional testing, and a full explanation to the Owner with a
suggested period of time to send in the request. Upon receipt of the request, it shall
be acknowledged and the Owner notified as to when the work will be performed.
(f) Title sheet of the report shall CERTIFY that all of the design requirements have been
met, that: "The test results given in the Report are true and accurate, and that the
systems including all controls, are performing as intended by the contract
documents." This sheet shall be signed, sealed and dated by the responsible
Registered Engineer who has been in charge of performing the test and balance.
(g) Six copies of the report shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
(7) Test and Balance data as applicable to be recorded (minimum):
(a) Hp, voltage and amps - nameplate on each motor.
(b) Hp, voltage amps and RPM - actual on each motor.
(c) CFM of each supply, return air, exhaust, and outside air opening and method of
measurement. Air shall be balanced to within 5% of that shown on drawings.
(d) Low pressure duct shall be observed and calculated for leakage. Contractor shall be
directed to provide additional sealing if test and balance estimates more than 5%
leakage. See entire specification for additional required testing.
(e) After occupancy, air shall be rebalanced as necessary to obtain uniform temperature
over areas or zones.
(f) Suction and discharge pressure and temperature compressor amps, for each
refrigeration cycle, and entering and leaving air temperature. Test and check for
proper refrigerant charge, oil level, unloader operation, safety switch operation and
ALL controls. Report on all items.
(g) RPM for each fan, including air supply, return, exhaust and/or recirculating.
(h) Total CFM and pressure readings across each component - coil, filter bank, fan, etc.
(i) Entering and leaving temperature and CFM for each heating coil or heating device
with heater operating at each different stage including full on.
(j) Entering and leaving DB and WB temperature and CFM for each cooling coil with
system at each different stage including full on.
(k) Air-cooled condenser or outdoor heat pump section; entering and leaving DB and
WB temperature of air, CFM of air entering and leaving, and complete motor and fan
data. Submit detailed instrument readings and certify results.
(l) Outside DB and WB temperature at time of each reading.
15100-11
(m) Settings left on all instruments.
(n) All controls shall be made to perform full range and all safety devices shall be made
to operate.
(o) Each system shall be tested for full capacity at appropriate outside conditions. Full
capacity heating and full capacity cooling shall be tested and reported. If outside
conditions are not close to design conditions, an extrapolation shall be performed to
arrive at predicted full load capacity. Report will not be considered complete without
the above.
(p) All adjustable fan drives (including exhaust and ventilating fans) shall be operating in
the middle third of their adjustable range after final balancing adjustments. Report
shall show complete detailed data on each drive: P.D. on each pulley, range on
adjustable pulley, sizes and number of belts, rated BHP of each, and setting left on
drive. Mechanical Contractor shall furnish all drives and materials as necessary to
meet the requirements of these specifications.
(q) Report sound levels in all finished spaces. Report on Forms 82300 and 82400 from
AABC National Standard.
(8) It shall be part of the Test and Balance Agency's responsibility to assist the Mechanical
Contractor with any adjustments or problems, where that assistance is needed, which
may develop in the one year warranty period.
1.23
PRIOR APPROVAL: Contractor shall base his bids on brands of equipment named in these
specifications. If any other manufacturer determines that his equipment will fit the space, suite all
job conditions, and meets or exceeds the quality of named brands, he may request in writing to
the Architect fourteen (14) days prior to bid date, permission to be included in the approved list. It
is ultimately the Architect's decision to approve or not approve any equipment as he deems fit.
1.24
EXISTING CONDITIONS:
A. All excavation and/or remodeling required shall be performed with care so as to not interrupt
other existing services (water, gas, electrical, sewer, sprinklers, etc.). If any service is
interrupted, it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to repair and replace that service
promptly at no expense to the Owner.
B. Any existing service (or operating system) which must be interrupted for any length of time
shall be supplied with a temporary service if necessary for continuation of the normal
operation of this facility.
C. All utilities, existing systems, and conditions shown on the plans as existing, are approximate
and the Contractor shall verify before any work is started.
D. Any interruptions of existing services and any work required to be done to or in existing
occupied space (including warranty work) must be at the Owner's convenience, using
overtime labor if required. Proper notice shall be given before any interruptions (48 hours
minimum). Interruption of the main utility systems shall be coordinated with Owner and a
minimum of one week's notice in writing will be required.
E. If the new construction requires the temporary removal of any existing service lines, etc.,
same shall be replaced and restored to the original conditions upon completion of the job. All
finished surfaces, walks, pavements, landscaping, etc., which are cut or damaged shall be
replaced and restore to original conditions to the full satisfaction of the Architect.
1.25
15100-12
WATER CONNECTIONS:
A. The Plumbing Contractor will provide water service. This Contractor shall make final
connections. Piping materials and installation shall conform to the SECTION: PLUMBING of
the specifications.
B. If equipment is installed which requires larger or different services from those shown on
plans, then this section shall pay for the additional services required. Coordinate utility
requirements with other sections.
1.26
AIR DISTRIBUTION
A. General:
(1) This part of the work shall include all ductwork used in the air conditioning, exhaust and
ventilation systems, supply air outlets, return air grilles, manual dampers, louver dampers
(manual or automatic), fire dampers, insulation, access panels, etc., with all accessories
to make a complete air distribution system. All air distribution items, ductwork, and
equipment in this section shall be constructed of galvanized or non-ferrous materials.
Ductwork shall be in accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA, except where these
specifications are more stringent, they shall be complied with.
(2) The Contractor shall provide, in addition to those shown, any required fittings, ells,
transitions, offsets, etc., as required to fit the ductwork within the building structure, such
as beams, trusses, bar joists, etc.
(3) Noise, vibration or drumming of air ductwork, noises at air outlets or returns, excessive
air leaks, malfunctioning of dampers, etc., will be cause for rejecting affected parts of the
ductwork.
(4) All ductwork and insulation shall conform to NFPA 90A, UL 181, Class 1 requirements.
All materials shall have a flamespread rating of 25 maximum and a smoke developed
rating of 50 maximum in accordance with NFPA 90A (including adhesive).
B. Duct Construction:
(1) Duct sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions and shall be increased both
ways for internally insulated ducts.
(2) All ducts 18" and over shall be cross broken.
(3) Longitudinal seams for No. 24 gauge metal may be either Pittsburgh Lock or approved
snap-lock construction. For heavier metal, use Pittsburgh Lock.
(4) Sweep elbows shall be made with inside radius equal to width of duct, except as shown
on drawings. If inside radius of elbow is less than 3/4 of duct width, multiple double
thickness hollow core turning vanes shall be used. Square elbows shall be provided with
approved double thickness hollow core turning vanes in all ductwork-supply, return,
exhaust and outside air whether shown on drawings or not.
(5) Transitions shall be made with a slope of 1 to 7 where space conditions permit.
(6) The weights of materials, type of joints and seams, bracing, and other construction
details shall be as recommended in Chapter 16, Duct Construction, ASHRAE
HANDBOOK, 1996, HVAC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT. Duct is low pressure
15100-13
classification unless noted otherwise. Exceptions: Metal lighter than 24 gauge shall not
be used. Construction not covered by above guidelines shall be in accordance with
HVAC Metal Duct Standards, 1985 by SMACNA. Where these specifications are more
stringent than the above standards, these specifications shall apply.
(7) Where ducts pass through floor, roof, ceiling or partitions, the space around the duct shall
be sealed and packed with fiberglass or other inert material as required for approval to
meet with applicable Code requirements. Provide angle collar made of No. 20 gauge
galvanized iron around ducts passing through building construction, on each side, to
conceal above construction. Where ducts pass through floors, the opening shall be
sealed with steel angles riveted to duct and anchored to slab.
(8) Horizontal ducts shall be hung at intervals not exceeding 8'-10" with 1.1/4" wide 16 gauge
galvanized iron hangers extending the full height of the duct, riveted thereto, and in turn
hung from the ceiling by bolts with expansion shields and inserts or bolted to steel
structure as applicable. All hangers shall be trimmed neatly. Wire hangers shall not be
used.
(9) All ducts shall be air tight, and joints shall be sealed with an approved sealing method as
necessary to make air tight. Leakage from low pressure duct (fan discharge to supply
outlets) shall not exceed 5%.
(10)Furnish and install all splitter dampers, manual dampers, and automatic dampers, as
follows:
(a) At each split in a main duct, furnish and install a splitter damper consisting of a blade
constructed of No. 18 gauge galvanized iron securely fastened with "U" bolts to a
square cold rolled steel operating rod. The length of the splitter damper shall be
1.1/2 times the width of the branch duct, but never less than 12". Install end bearings
with rubber gasket on the outside of the duct to prevent air leakage and to provide
smooth operation (end bearing Young No. 656 or equal). Where small branch ducts
take-off from main, they shall be made with a full 45 degree tap-in. In lieu of the
above, furnish and install an adjustable air volume extractor equal to Price AE1 with
access if above finished ceilings.
(b) Manual volume dampers shall be installed where shown on the drawings, and where
required to properly balance the system air flow. Where the damper blade width
does not exceed 10", damper may be of the "butterfly" type having a blade of 18
gauge galvanized steel securely fastened with "U" bolts to square cold rolled steel
operating rod, and having end bearings as described above. Where damper blade
width exceeds 10", dampers shall be of the multi-louver type with approved opposed
acting blades controlled from a single point with an adjusting device as described
below. Maximum blade width - 8", minimum - 6".
(c) Each manual splitter or volume damper shall be furnished with an adjusting device
having a locking mechanism. For all volume dampers, and for splitter dampers of 18"
length or less, the adjusting device shall be Young Type No. 1.G or approved equal.
For splitter dampers greater than 18" length, the adjusting device shall be Young
Type 900, or approved equal. For both volume and splitter dampers which are so
located that the adjusting devices would be otherwise inaccessible after building is
complete (no access doors possible), Young Type 912, 914 or approved equal shall
be provided. Where ductwork is concealed by furring or otherwise, adjusting devices
shall be secured to furring and exposed in the finished spaces.
(d) Mark all automatic and manual outside air dampers to show "open", "closed", and
"normal" positions. Mount rigid engraved markers with screws, same as specified in
15100-14
controls portion of the specifications.
(e) All dampers opening to the outside air shall have seals on edges and ends. Volume
dampers shall have rigid channel frames, which shall be inserted inside duct and
securely riveted or bolted thereto.
(f) Automatic louver dampers shall be same construction as manual volume dampers,
but shall be arranged for connecting appropriate damper motor linkage.
(g) Furnish and install where duct passes through floors, or fire walls, normally open fire
dampers to close in case of fire, same to be provided with tight-fittings access doors
for inspection and resetting. Fire dampers shall be secured to the structure with No.
10 gauge iron. Fire dampers shall be supported independently of the duct, from
angle iron frame fastened to wall or floor. Damper shall be gravity closed and shall
be held open by means of a pivoted non-corrosive lever and fusible link for 165
degrees F. Fire dampers shall be built and installed according to the
recommendations of the NFPA, shall be a U.L. labeled 1.1/2 hour rated damper
unless shown otherwise. Should there be any question as to location of fire
dampers, Architect's decision shall be final.
(h) Provide rated ceiling fire dampers in ceiling openings (diffusers, registers, and grilles)
which occur in ceilings that are a part of a U.L. rated ceiling assembly. Dampers shall
be U.L. rated ceiling dampers which are rated for that particular assembly.
(i) Smoke dampers shall be provided where shown and as required, complete with
actuating device in accordance with NFPA requirements. Dampers shall be U.L.
labeled to comply with U.L. 555S-B-III. Actuation to close shall be furnished and
installed by this section. See AUTOMATIC CONTROLS. Dampers shall be Ruskin
SD-35. The electric actuator, rated Class III, Category B, shall be provided and wired
complete by the Automatic Controls section.
(j) Provide all manual dampers, automatic dampers, fire dampers, and smoke detectors
(or combination) with an access door in the duct within 12" of the damper. See
Access Doors.
(k) Shop drawings of all dampers shall be submitted to the Architect for approval.
(11)Flexible connections shall be made between all fans and ducts using fire resistant
neoprene coated glass fiber cloth equal to "Ventglass" material as recommended and
manufactured by Vent Fabrics, Inc., Chicago, IL. The flexible connector shall be bridged
with 3/4" braided copper strip ground.
(12)Air tight sheet metal air chambers or plenums shall be provided where shown. Partitions
and plenums shall be constructed of No. 18 gauge galvanized steel riveted to 1.1/2" x
1.1/2" x 1/4" galvanized steel angles, spaced sufficiently close to insure rigidity. Angles
at bottom of partitions shall be bolted to concrete curb on not over 12" centers. Asphalt
impregnated gaskets shall be installed at all curb joints.
(13)Underground ductwork for garage exhaust system shall be equal to Perry Fiberglass
Single-Wall fiberglass reinforced plastic duct. Minimum wall thickness shall be 0.187”.
Duct material shall meet UL and Building Code standards.
C. Access Doors - Ductwork: Provide access doors in the ductwork where shown on the
drawings, and at each coil, humidifier, fire damper, duct heater, automatic or manual damper,
filters, smoke detectors, etc., and where necessary for cleaning, oiling, inspection, and
maintenance. All fasteners, hinges, bolts, rivets, etc., shall be galvanized, non-ferrous, or
15100-15
approved protection coated. Panels and doors in insulated casings or ducts shall have
similar thickness of insulation encased between galvanized sheets. Doors shall have
removable pin hinges with two cam lock fasteners, rubber gaskets, and shall be a standard
factory fabricated item. Minimum size 14" x 10" unless otherwise shown. Doors shall be
Ruskin ADH2 or approved equal.
D. Access Panels - Building: The air conditioning subcontractor shall furnish all access panels
required for access to his work for ceilings, walls, etc., not shown on architectural plans, and
shall make installations at locations as directed by the Architect. It shall be the responsibility
of the air conditioning subcontractor that access panels are provided for access to all
dampers, duct access panels, duct cleanouts, dampers, coils, fans, valves, etc., which may
be concealed by building construction. Access panels shall be installed so as not to interfere
with lighting arrangements. Access panels shall be Milcor Style K, L, or M as applicable.
E. Flexible Ducts: Flexible round duct shall be used for final connections for supply air to
diffusers ONLY where shown on plans, or when approved by the Architect in locations where
space is extremely limited. Flexible ducts shall NOT be used if not shown or expressly
permitted. Flexible round duct shall be aluminum duct, corrugated for ease of bending to a
radius of 1/2 of the diameter, self-supporting for a span of six feet, factory insulated with two
wraps of 3/4" thick fiberglass, enclosed in a seamless vinyl film sheath vapor barrier.
Connect to supply duct with 45 degree tap-in and a manual damper in each take-off. Any
connections including couplings shall be made with at least three metal fasteners, equally
spaced around the diameter, then taped with SMACNA approved 3" wide tape. Duct shall be
U.L. listed, Class 1, equal to that manufactured by Thermofin, Inc., Model 200. Maximum
length of flexible duct shall be 7' unless specifically approved by the Architect.
F. Registers, Grilles, and Diffusers: Registers, grilles, and diffusers shall be aluminum
construction (unless noted otherwise) with key operated opposed blade dampers. Finish shall
be brushed aluminum except where noted otherwise. Those in ceilings shall be off-white
baked enamel except as noted otherwise. Approved manufacturers – Price, Titus, Tuttle and
Bailey, Krueger, or Carnes. Other brands are not considered equal without prior approval.
(1) Sidewall Supply Registers (SWR): Double-deflection, wall-mounted supply grille equal to
Titus 300FS, with adjustable blades in both directions. Ceiling-Mount Supple Registers
(REG): Curved-blade type register for surface mount in ceiling with 1-way throw equal to
Titus 250-AA.
(2) Return Registers (RR): 100% extruded aluminum construction, perforated face, factory
baked enamel finish with color selected by the architect, Titus 350FL. Transfer Grilles
(TG): Titus 350FL. Finish for ceiling mounted items: Off-white baked enamel. Side Wall
Grilles and Registers shall have horizontal bars, with all front bar edges set at zero
degrees down for return air. Wall mounted return registers (RR) and transfer grilles (TG)
equal to Titus 350FL.
(3) Exhaust Grilles (EG) and Exhaust Registers (ER): Fixed bar type same as (RG) and
(RR). Grilles shall be without dampers and registers shall have opposed blade dampers.
Equal to Titus 350FL.
(4) Return or Exhaust Grilles or Registers which are to be installed in a lay-in grid system
shall be of the lay-in type construction (without face flanges) and shall have baked
enamel off-white finish.
(5) Register and diffuser dampers mechanisms shall be all aluminum - NO PLASTIC PARTS
ALLOWED.
(6) Air turning vanes equal to Titus AG-45-2 (adjustable gang operated blades) shall be
15100-16
installed at each 90 degree branch line take-off, and an air straightening device equal to
Price EG/S or EG/L (two sets of adjustable blades) at each supply register or diffuser,
located at point of tap-in or collar attachment. Installation shall include above such
devices in quantity as required for air balancing without the use of the final air outlet
damper.
(7) Plaster frames with slip joints shall be provided at all outlets set in plaster. Frames shall
be set exactly flush with plaster line, and Contractor shall have sheet metal mechanic on
the job to make this adjustment when finish coat of plaster is applied.
(8) Return air grilles 30" or more greatest dimension located in masonry walls, including
partitions, shall be set in 2" x 2" x 1/8" steel angle frame set flush with the wall. Corners
of the frame shall be mitered and welded.
(9) Design of air distribution products has been based on a typical manufacturer's catalog
data. When any manufacturer is submitted, supplier shall check all items for size, air
quantity, pressure drop, throw, and noise level and submittal shall show this: maximum
allowable pressure drop - .10"; Maximum neck velocity - 500 FPM. Maximum RC level –
shall be equal or less than 35 sones. Throw shall be as shown. He shall be responsible
for proper application of his products. He shall not offer air distribution outlets without the
air balancing devices specified above. The Contractor shall be responsible for correction
of unacceptable noise levels in occupied spaces.
G.
Duct Insulation:
(1) Low Pressure: Duct insulation shall be applied to the inside of all metal ductwork
including sheet metal casings for the first 10’-0” from the fan. Duct dimensions shall be
increased both ways by the thickness of the insulation to maintain same duct inside areas
as shown on drawings. Insulation shall be constructed of long glass fibers, shall be 1-1/2
lb. density minimum and shall have smooth neoprene coating next to the air stream
which complies with NFPA Bulletin 90A and is so labeled, shall be cemented with U.L.
approved fire resistive adhesive using 100% coverage to the metal and shall be secured
additionally where over 18" wide with "Mechanical Clips", one per square foot. Insulation
shall have a thermal conductivity "k" of 0.125 or R-8. Duct shall be externally wrapped
and only bare metal shall be in the air stream. All ductwork installed outside building
envelope shall be internally insulated and sealed water tight.
All joints in insulation shall be brushed with adhesive and butted together. All joints in
insulation at duct joints, etc., shall be butted tightly together and sealed with mastic or
glue. There shall be no raw edges of the insulation exposed to the air stream; cover with
zee bars where necessary. There shall be complete sealing of edges with glue or mastic
such that the joints are stronger than the insulation. Cut insulation approximately 1/4"
longer than duct section to allow for compression of the edges together when field
erected. Apply glue or mastic to both raw edges before joining. Continuity of the
insulation shall not be broken.
Duct liner shall be 1" thickness for supply and return and 1" thickness for exhaust and
outside air. Insulate all exhaust duct. Submit for approval.
Where additional insulation is required to meet the Florida Energy Code, it shall be added
in the form of outside duct-wrap as specified below for medium pressure, thickness as
required. This applies to both metal duct and to fiberglass duct.
(2) Diffuser Drops: The Contractor shall wrap the diffuser drops with faced duct wrap of
fiberglass, minimum 2" thick, one pound density with Foil-Scrim- Kraft vapor barrier jacket
equal to Owens-Corning Commercial Grade, Type 150, "k" value of 0.25". Lap jacket at
15100-17
least 2", secure with outward clinch staples, minimum 3" o.c., and tape with 3" wide
Foil-Scrim-Kraft tape. Do not over-compress insulation.
(3) Any ductwork which is installed in an attic space outside the building insulation envelope
shall have additional duct wrap (as specified above) applied to the duct as required to
meet the Florida Energy Code.
H. Louvers: Louvers for mechanical section shall be extruded aluminum construction, anodized
finish in color as selected by Architect, 4" depth, approximately 45 degree angled blades, and
frame to suit job conditions. See Architectural details for head, jamb, and sill requirements.
Provide channel frame and flanges if required. General Contractor shall approve submittals,
with attention to above, before forwarding to Architect. Louver shall be properly flashed.
Frame and blades shall be 6063-T52 alloy, minimum 0.085" thick. Fasteners shall be
stainless steel or aluminum. Furnish with 1/2" aluminum wire bird screen, fastened to outside
of louver. Louvers shall be Greenheck Model 435X as scheduled on the drawings or equal
by Ruskin. All louvers shall be minimum Florida product approved for with wind loading and
missile impact ratings required by the location.
I.
Any material(s) visible through a grille, register or diffuser which are not flat black shall be
painted flat black by this Contractor.
J.
Shop drawings of all outlets, return grilles, insulation, louvers, vents and curbs shall be
submitted to the Architect for approval.
1.27
WATERPROOFING: This Contractor shall install all roof mounted items and wall mounted
(exterior) items in a manner that will prevent any storm water from entering the building. The
equipment, louvers, wall or roof vents, control items, etc., shall be his full responsibility and the
flashing, counterflashing, caulking, etc., shall be in a manner as approved by the Architect.
Submit details for approval.
1.28
VENTILATION FANS: Furnish and install exhaust and supply fans of the type and capacity as
shown on the drawings. Fans shall comply with the following:
A.
All fans to bear the AMCA seal of certification for capacity and sound rating and shall be
in strict accordance with specified maximum RPM and sones.
B.
Fans shall be Penn, Greenheck, or Loren Cook. Other brands not acceptable without
prior approval.
C.
Fan capacity shall not be less than indicated CFM against the static pressure of the
system as installed, using increased fan horsepower (over standard) if required (fan
horsepower on drawings is only approximate). Belt drive fans shall all have adjustable
speed belt drive sized for 150% of motor HP, and shall be operating in middle 1/3 of
speed range after balancing.
Direct drive fans shall be of the multi-speed type where shown on plans or have speed
controllers installed.
D.
All roof mounted fans to be backward curved centrifugal, belt or direct drive as shown on
plans, with rectangular aluminum housing with all aluminum construction, low silhouette
type, aluminum or approved bird screen (must give 100% protection), back-draft damper,
U.L. rated disconnect switch and factory applied finish of baked enamel, light grey color.
E.
All fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall run on permanently
lubricated bearings. Any fan which, in the opinion of the Architect, has excessive noise
or vibrations shall be replaced. For fans above 1/2 HP, all bearings shall be ball or roller
15100-18
type, grease lubricated.
F.
1.29
Install fan controls, interlocks, manual switches, Mark Time switches, overload protection,
magnetic starters, etc., as required. Two speed fans shall have two windings, 1800/1200
RPM motors. All three phase motors (see Electrical Drawings) and motors larger than
1/2 HP shall have magnetic starters. Breakers or disconnects shall not be used for
start-stop service. All fan motors shall be high efficiency rated Gould's "E-Plus" motors or
approved equal.
PIPING:
A.
Pipe: All pipe shall be new. When threaded, all threads shall be clean cut of the proper
taper. Ends shall be reamed free from burrs. Pipe shall be cleaned before installation, and
shall be protected during installation to avoid entrance of foreign matter. All piping shall be
pressure tested in the presence of the Architect before it is covered or insulated.
All piping shall be supported with adequate hangers and supports, shall be run straight and
true, shall be free from sags and traps, and proper consideration shall be given to provide for
expansion and contraction in the system.
The following classification and types of pipe shall govern:
(1)
1.30
Drain: Type L copper. Run full size of drain connection to floor drain with trap at the
pan connection. Install a brass union between trap and pan. Provide at least a 3"
water seal.
AUTOMATIC CONTROLS:
A. Furnish and install a complete system of solid state ELECTRONIC automatic controls,
including all instruments, dampers, valves, relays, switches, etc., as shown on the drawings,
as specified herein for individual pieces of equipment and as required to accomplish the
desired results from the air conditioning, heating, and ventilation systems. Control systems
shall include operations of temperature controls, ventilation systems, and all mechanical
equipment. All control devices shall be by the same manufacturer.
B. Control system shall be installed by a Controls Sub-Contractor, who will have the sole
responsibility for complete installation, including controls of a single manufacturer, wiring,
diagram, check-out, and adjust, etc. All work shall be performed by mechanics who are his
full-time employees.
C. Controls Sub-Contractor shall prepare and submit control diagrams which shall show the
following:
(1) Controls for ALL mechanical equipment installed under this Contract.
(2) Power, wiring, motors, circuit breakers, starters, pilot lights, manual switches, contactors,
etc.
(3) Interlock wiring or tubing.
(4) Controls including temperature, operating, safety, etc.
(5) Internal wiring of all package equipment.
(6) Internal circuits of all control devices.
15100-19
(7) Complete point-to-point connections of all wiring.
(8) Color coding and terminal numbering of all wiring.
(9) Panel as a separate unit and all its internal wiring.
(10)Panel face showing to scale all items thereon and nameplates.
(11)Sequence of operation in clear, concise laymen's language.
(12)A complete legend including all abbreviations, designations, etc.
(13)Nameplate for each and every instrument.
(14)Manufacturer's number of each instrument.
(15)Control setting, range and differential on instrument and control device.
(16)Physical dimensions of control panels and wall where panel is mounted thereon.
D. Submittal shall include manufacturer's specification sheets on all control devices giving
complete description and capabilities, valve and damper capacities with pressure drop and
torque requirements, power consumption, etc., each item clearly identified on each sheet.
E. After installation is complete, the control contractor shall regulate, calibrate, and adjust all
controls, instruments, dampers, valves, etc., and shall place them in operating conditions,
subject to the approval of the Architect. He shall coordinate the controls check-out with the
Test and Balance Agency. A controls technician shall assist the Test and Balance Agency in
performing the total test and balance the system in any manner requested. See Test and
Balance Section and comply with that Section. Provide all maintenance, service, and
adjustments incidental to the proper performance of the control system for the guarantee
period (one year).
F. Before final inspection of the job, an approved copy of the diagram shall be photographically
reproduced, full size, framed under glass and posted on the job. Location shall be as
directed by the Architect.
G. All control wiring shall be in CONCEALED conduit and shall comply with the Electrical
Section of the specifications. All control conduit or tubing shall be CONCEALED in occupied
areas of the building. Existing walls shall be chased and patched where necessary for
concealed wiring or tubing. Where installed in Mechanical Rooms, conduit and tubing shall
run straight and true, parallel, and shall present a neat appearance. Tubing and conduit shall
be properly supported with standard catalog hangers, fasteners, and clamps, all with
corrosion resistant coatings. Conduit or tubing shall not be exposed in janitor's closets,
storage rooms, workroom, and similar spaces.
H. Locations of control instruments shall be as indicated on the drawings, or as directed.
System installed shall be complete with all instruments, control wiring, conduit, electric
devices, etc. Do not mount any conduit, relays, contactors, etc., on the A.C. Unit casings.
Use LIQUID-TIGHT flexible conduit (18" maximum length) to any instrument which must be
mounted on AC Units, such as firestats and bridge all flexible connections with this flexible
conduit.
I.
Thermostats shall have a plain locking cover with no thermometer and no external
adjustment. Access shall be with tamperproof screws. Provide separate cooling and heating
thermostats if required for the designed operation. All thermostats shall have the same
15100-20
external appearance. Provide each thermostat with a heavy duty security type clear Lexan,
tumbler key locking, thermostat guard. There shall be concealment of all conduit in finished
or occupied spaces.
J.
Provide nameplates for every control device in or out of a panel of engraved hard plastic
(Formica) of contrasting colors, mechanically fastened. Provide printed instruction signs for
ventilation fans, see plans.
K. Provide interlock controls, manual switches, and thermostats for ventilation fans as shown
on drawings and in schedules. If no controls are shown, interlock each exhaust fan with AC
unit serving that respective area.
L. Sequence of Operation: Provide thermostat sub-base with "HEAT-AUTO-COOL" switch and
"FAN-AUTO-ON" switch.
M. Install a three phase power monitor which will sense:
(1) Loss of any phase.
(2) Low voltage on any or all phases.
(3) Phases reversed from A-B-C sequence. Monitor shall interrupt the control power to all air
conditioning, heat and ventilating equipment causing all three phase motors to cease
operation. Power monitor shall have automatic reset, and adjustable sensitivity.
Adjustable time delay on restart shall provide where required by a number of motors
being restarted at once.
N. Lightning Protection for Controls: Provide a surge suppressor, 15 amps capacity, 120 volts,
with 2 filter banks (one secondary stand-by stage), circuit breaker protected, and a lighted
ON-OFF switch. It shall have a transient response time within 5 nano seconds. Unit shall
provide high voltage spike suppression between hot, ground, and neutral, with the spike
suppression to begin at 140 volts, with 13,000 amps peak capacity. Unit shall be U.L.
approved. Install unit on a 120-volt circuit and feed all controls from this circuit. Surge
suppressor shall be a Tripp Lite Company, Model IB4-6, or a Northern Technologies, Inc.,
Model TCS20-HW, no other unit considered equal without prior approval. If it is not feasible
to supply all controls (total project) from one 120-volt circuit, provide all control circuits with
the above surge suppressor protection.
O. Controls shall be checked out and be ready for the Test and Balance Agency as soon as
possible after installation is made. See Test and Balance Section. Contractor shall assist
Test and Balance Agency in every possible way.
Upon completion of the job, after final test and balance, the Contractor shall submit a letter,
signed by the responsible person, certifying that all of the controls have been checked out;
that is, each and every operating control has been observed to operate correctly, that every
phase of control has been made to operate fully, and that each and every safety control has
been made to operate. Final payment will not be made until the certification has been
submitted and approved.
1.31
Central Station Air Handling Unit
System Description
A. Indoor mounted central station air-handling unit designed to provide air to a conditioned
space as required to meet specified performance requirements for ventilation, heating,
cooling, filtration and distribution. Unit shall be assembled for draw-thru application and shall
be arranged to discharge conditioned air horizontally or vertically as shown on the contract
drawings.
15100-21
B. Unit with a direct-expansion cooling coil shall have the capability to be used in a refrigerant
circuit in conjunction with air-cooled condensing units.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unit performance shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430 for Central Station
Air-Handling Units.
B. Coils shall be certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410.
C. Direct expansion coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.
D. Insulation and insulation adhesive shall comply with NFPA 90A requirements for flame
spread and smoke generation.
E. Unit shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001:2000 manufacturing quality
standard.
F. Unit shall be constructed in accordance with ETL and CSA standards and shall carry the ETL
and CSA labels.
G. Unit shall be stored and handled in accordance with the unit manufacturer’s instructions.
EQUIPMENT
A. General: Unit shall be a factory-assembled, single-piece central station air handler. Unit may
consist of a fan and coil section with factory-installed chilled water or direct expansion coil,
preheat or reheat coil, heating coil section, filter section, mixing box or combination
filter/mixing box, or access section as indicated on the equipment schedules. Unit base rail
shall be 14 gage galvanized steel.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Unit panels shall be constructed of 20 gage galvanized steel. Casing panels shall be
removable for easy access to the unit. All panels shall be gasketed to ensure a tight seal.
2. Hinged access doors shall be double wall with 1.5 lb dual-density fiberglass between
galvanized steel panels.
3. Insulation for casing panels on unit shall be 1-in. minimum thickness dual-density
fiberglass insulation with a nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb per cubic foot.
4. Insulation shall be secured to casing with waterproof adhesive.
5. Condensate drain pans shall be sloped to prevent standing water and constructed of
stainless steel; they shall have double wall construction with threaded drain connection.
C. Fan Section:
1. Fan sections shall be constructed of galvanized steel and shall have a formed channel
base for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. Fan scroll, wheel, shaft, and
bearings are to be rigidly secured to the base unit.
2. Each unit shall have a single fan wheel and scroll. Fans shall be double width, double
inlet type, with forward-curved blades. Wheels shall be bonderized steel with baked
enamel, or galvanized steel.
3. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be designed for continuous operation at
the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheels and shafts shall be
selected to operate at least 25% below the first critical speed, and shall be statically and
dynamically balanced as an assembly.
4. Fan shafts shall be solid steel, turned, ground and polished.
5. Fan bearings shall be self-aligning, pillow-block regreasable ball type selected for an
average life of 200,000 hours at design operation conditions, per ANSI Code B3.15.
6. Fan motor shall be mounted within the fan section casing on slide rails having 2 adjusting
screws. Motor shall be NEMA Design B with sizes and electrical characteristics as shown
on the equipment schedule.
7. Fan drive shall be designed for a 1.5 service factor and shall be factory mounted and
aligned. Belt drive shall be variable or fixed-pitch type.
D. Coil Sections:
1. All coils shall have mill galvanized casings. Coils shall be factory leak tested at 450 psig
air pressure.
2. Direct-expansion coils shall have aluminum plate fins with belled collars bonded to 1/2-in.
15100-22
OD copper tubes by mechanical expansion. Coils shall be provided with pressure-type
brass distributors with solder-type connections and shall have a minimum of 2
distributors. Coils for full face active or face-split operation shall have intertwined circuits
for equal loading on each circuit. Suction and discharge connections shall be on the
same end. Coils shall be designed and tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15.
3. Electric heat coils for use in large air-handling units shall be open wire type, 80% nickel,
20% chromium resistance coils, insulated by floating steatite bushings and supported in a
galvanized steel frame. Bushings shall be recessed into embossed openings and stacked
into supporting brackets spaced on not more than 4-in. centers. Thermal cutouts for
primary and secondary overtemperature protection shall be provided to meet UL and
NEC requirements. Maximum element heating density shall be 55 watts/sq inch. An
integral control box shall be furnished by the manufacturer. It shall contain thermal
cutouts, primary and secondary control, subcircuit fusing, airflow switch, and fused
control transformer.
E. Filter Sections:
1. Each filter section shall be designed and constructed to house the specific type of filter
specified on the equipment schedule.
2. Flat filter sections shall accept filters of standard sizes. Sections shall include side access
slide rails and hinged door access. Flat filter section shall be arranged with minimum
depth in direction of airflow.
3. Angle filter section shall accept 2-in. filters arranged in horizontal V formation.
Doublewalled hinged doors shall be provided.
F. Damper Sections:
1. Mixing boxes and filter mixing boxes shall have parallel blade, interconnecting outside-air
and return-air dampers. Damper blades shall have parallel bends for stiffness and shall
be welded to 1/2-in. diameter steel rods rotating in nylon bushings and mounted in rigid
galvanized steel frames. Dampers shall be sectionalized to limit blade width to no more
than 50-in. to minimize blade warpage and to ensure tight closure. All mixing boxes and
filter mixing boxes shall have double-walled hinged access doors.
2. All dampers for mixing boxes and filter mixing boxes shall be rated as low-leakage
dampers, having a leakage rate not to exceed 2% of air quantity calculated at 2000 fpm
velocity through damper and 4.0-in. wg pressure difference. Damper blades shall be
gasketed and perimeter sealing strips shall be provided.
G. Access Sections:
1. Access sections shall be installed where indicated on the drawings and shall be as
specified on the equipment schedule.
2. Access sections shall have double-walled hinged doors.
1.32
AIR HANDLING UNIT
A. Where shown and/or specified on the drawings, furnish and install a split system package
type heat pump unit. Units shall be specifically approved by the manufacturer for this
application with vertical separation as required between inside and outside units. Units shall
be Carrier or approved equal by York or Trane.
B. Capacity of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings and shall be ARI Standard rated with
the outside units.
C. Cooling coils shall be of non-ferrous construction with mechanically bonded smooth plate fins
with a total face area of not less than as shown on drawings.
D. Inside fan section shall have forward-curved blades, double-inlet fans. Fans shall be
statically and dynamically balanced and shall run on permanently lubricated bearings. Fan
capacity shall be not less than indicated CFM against the static pressure of the system as
installed, using INCREASED fan horsepower (over standard) or a larger fan section of coilfan package if required (fan horsepower on drawings is only approximate). Fan shall be
15100-23
direct drive with multiple speed motor. Fan motor shall be permanent split capacitor type.
E. Casing shall be made of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel,
insulated to prevent condensation and lower sound level.
F. Where shown on plans, electrical heater shall be factory installed in cooling/heating units.
Heater shall have outside thermostat which will lock out heaters at temperatures above
setting. Provide emergency "ON" bypass switch. All heaters shall be equipped with both
thermal and current overload devices, and the required heating and cooling system controls
including 40-va control circuit (24V) transformer.
G. Installation of all A.C. units shall be made using accessory plenums, bases, etc., either
factory or shop built, as necessary for each access to filters, for inspection and replacement,
and for minimum noise transmission to occupied space. Shop built plenums shall be
submitted for approval. Filters to be as shown on plans. Furnish two complete sets. Access
panels shall be provided on the unit for easy access for maintenance and inspection. Panels
shall be gasketed air tight.
1.33
HEAT PUMP OUTDOOR UNIT – Outdoor unit shall be factory assembled package with
compressor and air source coil mounted within the same cabinet designed for outdoor mounting.
Unit shall be complete with receiver, high and low pressure switches, filter-driers, internal motor
protection, crankcase heater, and safety controls.
A. Unit shall be designed for installation outdoors with zinc coated or aluminum casings and
have protective screen over coil surfaces to protect coil from damage. Fan shall have guard
if exposed.
B. Coils shall be non-ferrous construction, with aluminum fins and shall be circuited for subcooling.
C. Service valves shall be provided on inlet and outlet of compressor and on outlet of receiver.
Compressor(s) shall be hermetic, and have external spring isolators and be located in an
isolated compartment. Compressor(s) shall have original compressor manufacturer's five (5)
year warranty. Submit copy of warranty.
D. Provide time delay device to prevent compressor from starting within four minutes after
stopping for any reason. Unit shall match with inside unit coil and shall be ARI Standard
rated.
E. Provide a starting capacitor kit which will increase starting torque to allow compressor motor
to start at any load conditions.
F. Submittal shall include actual manufacturer wiring diagram (not a schematic) and piping
diagram (see Refrigerant Piping Section). Submittal shall clearly show (S)EER, COP and
HSPF.
G. The unit shall be factory wired, factory charged with refrigerant, and factory tested. Units
shall be Carrier or approved equal by York or Trane.
H. The manufacturer shall warrant the installation of their equipment, located as shown on
plans, with up to 75 feet of vertical height between the inside and the outside unit. Provide
any auxiliary controls or devices recommended by the manufacturer for this type installation.
I.
The manufacturer and the contractor shall provide an additional refrigerant cycle warranty of
four years on parts, labor, refrigerant, piping, oil, freight, insulation, and all other items
involved to replace a compressor or any part of the refrigeration cycle during the warranty
15100-24
period at no cost to the Owner.
J.
See Mechanical Sheets for additional specs.
(End of Section 15100)
15400-1
Plumbing
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING
1.1
1.2
SCOPE: The work covered in this Section of the specification consists of providing all materials,
labor and equipment required for a complete plumbing installation in accordance with the
drawings and specifications, together with items reasonably inferred, including installation of
equipment as noted. The intent of the specifications is to include everything necessary for the
completion of the work with the materials best adapted to the purpose. Even though every item
of the work or materials involved is not shown on the drawings or not particularly mentioned, the
Contractor shall furnish same and execute the work to the entire satisfaction and approval of the
Architect. The work includes the following but is not necessarily limited to these.
A.
All drain, waste and vent piping for complete sanitary sewer system including
connections to all fixtures requiring drain connections.
B.
All water piping including connections to all fixtures requiring cold water and/or hot water.
C.
Rough piping installation and final connections (or future stub-outs) for equipment
furnished by others.
D.
All materials, equipment, fixtures, insulation, accessories and trim, as shown, specified
and/or required to make a complete usable and finished installation.
E.
Necessary trenching and backfilling to install the plumbing system.
F.
All storm water piping as shown on the drawings including roof drains, rain leaders,
exterior piping, etc., as required for a complete system.
G.
All labor, materials, compatible fittings, etc., as required to make main connections to
existing sanitary sewer, domestic water, etc., as applicable.
CONNECTIONS AND REGUATIONS: Contractor shall contact the Utility Authorities serving this
project prior to submitting a bid, and obtain information concerning permits, meter charges, tap-on
fees, main extensions, final connection charges, any and all charges by the utilities. The
Contractor shall include in his bid all tap fees, meter charges, and the performance of or pay for
all work involved to obtain necessary services. All work required shall be done or paid for by this
Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
No deviation from the drawings and specifications shall be made without the full knowledge and
consent of the Architect.
The Contractor shall comply with all legal regulations that may be necessary for fully completing
the work. When the Contractor finds the Specifications and/or Drawings to be in conflict or not
clear, or any portion to be in conflict with any applicable code or regulation, same shall be brought
to the attention of the Architect prior to submitting a bid. All work in this section shall be in
compliance with the latest issue of the listed Rules and Codes. When more than one code
applies the most stringent shall apply:
(1) 2010 Florida Building Code - Building.
(2) 2010 Florida Building Code - Plumbing.
(3) 2010 Florida Accessibility Code.
15400-2
Plumbing
(4) 2010 Florida Fuel Gas Code
(5) NFPA 101
All equipment supplied by this section which has electrical requirements, connections, motors,
starters, heaters, controls, etc., shall bear a U.L. label showing U.L. approval, or same by an
approved equal testing laboratory.
1.3
SITE INSPECTIONS: Before submitting proposals, each bidder shall visit the site and fully
familiarize themselves with all job conditions and shall be fully informed as to the extent of his
work. No considerations will be given after bid opening date to alleged misunderstandings as to
the requirements of work involved or as to requirements of materials to be furnished.
1.4
COOPERATION: This Contractor shall lay out and proceed with his work so that this work will be
executed in harmony and all other crafts pertaining to the building. Should any doubt arise as to
the meaning of the drawings or specifications, this Contractor shall first obtain the decision of the
Architect before proceeding with such work as may be affected.
This Contractor shall work in harmony with all other Contractors and trades on the job and install
his work as fast as the progress of the job will permit.
1.5
1.6
QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND APPROVALS:
A.
Approval of the shop drawings as submitted does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to comply with the Contract Documents.
B.
Any deviation from the Contract Documents shall be specifically noted in the submittals in
a manner which will call attention of the Architect to the deviation. If there is no specific
allowance for deviation by the Architect, the Contractor shall comply with the Contract
Documents.
C.
The materials and equipment are specified by manufacturer and model number for the
purpose of establishing type and quality required. Other manufacturer's products of
equal quality and type, as determined by the Architect, may be used when approved. All
materials and equipment shall be domestic, made in the USA.
TESTS:
A.
Concealed work shall remain uncovered until required tests have been completed. All
tests shall be made in the presence of representatives of the Architect. Repairs of
defects that are discovered as a result of inspections or tests shall be made with new
materials. Caulking of screwed joints, cracks, or holes, will not be accepted. Tests shall.
be repeated after defects have been eliminated.
B.
Drain Systems: A water test shall be applied to all parts of the drainage systems before
the pipes are concealed or fixtures set in place. The test may be applied in the highest
opening above the roof, and the entire system shall be filled with water up to the overflow
point of this highest opening. All parts of the system shall be subject to not less than ten
(10) feet hydrostatic head except the uppermost ten (10) feet of the piping directly below
the opening. The water shall remain in the system for not less than four (4) hours. If
leaks at any joint or lowering of water levels occur, make necessary corrections.
C.
Water supply tests shall be applied to all parts of the water supply system before the
piping is concealed or before the fixtures are connected. A hydrostatic pressure of not
15400-3
Plumbing
less than 100 pounds per square inch shall be applied to the system for two (2) hours
and there shall be no leaks at any joint in the system at this pressure.
D.
1.7
1.8
1.9
Sterilization: The entire water distribution system shall be thoroughly sterilized with
solution containing not less that 50 parts per million available chlorine. The chlorinating
material shall be acceptable by the State Board of Health Authorities, and shall be
introduced into the system in accordance with their recommendations. The sterilizing
solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of eight (8) hours during
which time all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After
sterilization, the solution shall be flushed from the system with clean water. The
complete sterilization operation shall be approved by the State Board of Health
Representative.
CUTTING, BACKFILLING AND EXCAVTING:
A.
Sewer and water pipes shall be laid in separate trenches.
B.
When backfill is anything other than clean white sand or inert clay, this Contractor shall
encase all steel, wrought iron, and copper pipe in clay or clean white sand not less than
nine (9) inches all around.
PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION:
A.
Plumbing fixtures and trim shall be protected against damage or injury due to building
materials, acid, tools, equipment or any causes incidental to construction. The finished
surface of each fixture shall be covered with building paper or similar protection and the
fixtures encased in wood box or crate. Chromium-plated surfaces shall be covered to
protect their Polish. All fixtures damaged by any cause and any trim marred or scratched
shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. The fixture protection shall be removed and
fixtures thoroughly cleaned by the Contractor and shall be ready for use by the Owner.
B.
All pipe openings shall be enclosed with plugs or caps during construction. The plugs or
caps shall be installed when the pipe is roughed-in and shall not be removed until final
connections are made. Plugs or caps shall be substantial enough to withstand the test
pressures of the system as specified herein.
VALVES:
A.
General: Valves and cocks shall be installed as called for on the drawings and/or when
found to be necessary for proper operation and servicing of the equipment. Furnish
valves in all runouts to equipment, ALL BRANCHES from risers, ALL BRANCHES from
mains, etc., where shown or not. Valves and cocks shall be as follows or approved equal
as manufactured by Jenkins Brothers, Stockham, Lunkenheimer, Walworth or Nibco.
Submit valves for approval.
B.
Gate Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: All brass or bronze construction, screwed type, with
union bonnet, rising stem, suitable for 150 pounds working pressure. Approved: Nibco
135.
C.
Gate Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: Iron body, brass, trimmed OS&Y, flanged, suitable
for 125 pounds working pressure. Approved: Nibco F-617-0.
D.
Globe Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: Union bonnet, Teflon disc, bronze body, for 150
pounds working pressure. Approved: Nibco S-235-Y.
1.10
1.11
15400-4
Plumbing
E.
Globe Valves 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: OS&Y, bronze trim, iron body, flanged ends, for
125 pounds working pressure. Approved: Nibco F-718.
F.
Ball Valves (2" and smaller) bronze body, 3 piece bolted construction, resilient seat, 150
lb. rated, full port. Approved: Nibco T-595-Y.
G.
Check Valves: Spring loaded silent check, bronze body up through 2", iron body above
2", equal to Nibco 480 or 960, 250 pound working pressure.
H.
Valve Boxes: Outside valves in underground lines shall be provided with a two or three
piece telescoping screw type cast iron valve box with properly marked round drop cover.
If not located in pavement, provide 18" square concrete block, 4" thick, flush with grade.
Shaft size shall be appropriate for the valve size, and boxes shall be equal to U.S. Cast
Iron Pipe No. US-583, US-591, or US-598.
I.
Pressure Regulating Valve: Pressure reducing valve shall be bronze body and have
renewable stainless steel seat, stainless steel integral strainer, high temperature
diaphragm, and thermal expansion bypass check valve feature. Rated for initial pressure
up to 300 psi and reduced pressure of 25 to 75 psi. Valve shall be Watts 135 or U135B,
full line size. Install where shown or required by Code.
J.
Backflow Preventer: For main water service, brass body, double check valve type with
shut-off valves and ball type test cocks, ASSE 1015, AWWA 506. Type of unit shall be in
accordance with local codes, and shall be factory assembled. For mechanical system
supply, appropriate size unit, ASSE 1012, may be used. Main unit shall be equal to
Watts 709 series, mechanical systems supply - Watts No. 9D series. Unless shown
otherwise, install in the building with proper access, as directed. Units with relief port
shall have a funnel drain with 7/8" copper drain line extended to floor drain or to the
outside.
UNIONS:
A.
Unions shall be ground joint type, bronze insert, compatible with pipe to which each is
connected. Unions shall be placed on the outside of all equipment fixtures, tanks,
meters, heaters, etc., not equipped with union connections.
B.
Dielectric unions shall be provided at connection of dissimilar metals, pressure rating 250
pounds per square inch with gasket material suitable for 210 degrees F. water service.
PIPE AND FITTINGS:
A.
Waste and Vent Piping:
(1)
Below the first floor: Piping shall be service weight cast-iron with bell and spigotlead caulked, bell and spigot-neoprene push type gasket, cast iron "No-Hub" with
MG cast-iron couplings, "Clamp All" couplings, or Code approved PVC. Cast
Iron Pipe shall be coated inside and outside with coal-tar varnish. "No-Hub"
joints below floor shall be type MG cast iron couplings or "Clamp All" couplings
only. See "PLASTIC PIPE" below.
(2)
Above the first floor: Piping shall be service weight cast-iron with bell and spigot
lead caulked or "No-Hub" joints. PVC may be used in locations where Codes
permit. See "PLASTIC PIPE" below. PVC shall not be run exposed in the
building.
(3)
B.
C.
1.12
15400-5
Plumbing
Beyond 5'-0" Outside building: Sanitary sewer piping shall be vitrified clay
conforming to the latest edition of ASTM Specification C-700. Joints shall
conform to ASTM Specification C-425 Type III or pipe and fittings may be Code
approved PVC pipe installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. See
"PLASTIC PIPE" below.
Water Piping:
(1)
Hot and cold water piping shall be copper tubing, type "K" or type "L" hard with
sweat fittings. Where possible, all water piping shall be above the ceiling. Piping
below the ceiling which is specified is to be insulated.
(2)
Building water service beyond 5’-0” outside the building shall be Schedule 40
galvanized steel, pressure rated CPVC or type "K" copper, at Contractor's option
and Codes permitting.
Storm Drain Piping: Piping below floor shall be the same as waste and vent specified
above. Rain leaders above the floor may be Schedule 40 galvanized steel, Code
approved PVC or no-hub cast-iron. Storm drains outside the building shall be vitrified
clay as specified for sanitary sewer, or Code approved PVC. Pipe 12" and larger shall be
reinforced concrete pipe in accordance with ASTM C-76, and rubber gasket joint system
in accordance with ASTM C-443. Joints for all storm drain piping outside the building
shall be slip-on gasketed type. See "PLASTIC PIPE" specifications for PVC
requirements.
PLASTIC PIPE: Contractor may, at his option and with Architectural and Code approval, use
PVC pipe in certain locations ONLY where specifically permitted HERE-IN-BEFORE. For
pressure pipe: Use Schedule 40 pipe with Schedule 80 fittings; for above grade locations, use
solvent weld (glue) joints; below grade locations shall use Schedule 40 or SDR-21 (200 psi rated)
pipe with Schedule 80 fittings and Ring-Tite or glue joints. For DWV: Above grade locations,
Schedule 40 pipe and Schedule 40 fittings with solvent weld joints, below grade locations shall
use Schedule 40 pipe and fittings with Ring-Tite or solvent weld joints. Rain leaders and storm
drain piping shall be same as DWV. All pipe and fittings shall be installed in compliance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
A.
Scope: Use PVC pipe for the applications only as specifically noted HERE-IN-BEFORE.
All other portions of the specifications shall apply as applicable.
B.
Materials: PVC pipe and fittings shall be produced from materials conforming to ASTM
D1785, Type I, Grade I, 2000 psi design stress (PVC 1120). All pipe and fittings shall be
as recommended by pipe manufacturer. All plastic pipe used on the job shall comply with
the material specification. Pipe used in the sanitary sewer system shall be marked
NSF/DWV, and that in the potable system shall be marked NSF/pw.
C.
Installation: Pipe shall be installed and tested in accordance with the specifications.
D.
Adaptors: Threaded adapters below 2" size shall be female metal to PVC male thread
type, 2" and above shall be flanged and gasketed type. NO saddle taps allowed.
E.
All materials including Plastic Pipe which are installed in a "UL Rated Assembly" shall
meet the requirements of UL for installation in that particular assembly. If plastic pipe
cannot meet the required fire hazard rating, the installation is prohibited.
F.
Additional supports on horizontal runs shall be provided as necessary to limit sagging
and as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe must grade uniformly.
1.13
15400-6
Plumbing
G.
Temporary caps on all stub-outs must withstand the test pressures of the system.
H.
System shall be installed as necessary to allow for expansion and contraction.
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEM:
A.
Grade: All building sewers shall have a uniform grade of not less than 1/8" to the foot,
downward in direction of flow, for pipe 3" and larger. Pipe smaller than 3" shall have
grade of 1/4" to the foot.
B.
Soil, Waste and Vent Stacks: Where shown and where required, install soil, waste, vent
stacks of sizes shown on the drawings and with branches connecting all fixtures and
other apparatus requiring waste generally as shown. Stacks shall be offset at beams,
roof flashings, and as necessary to miss other obstructions, and at least 18" from edge of
roof. Vents shall be located at least 10 feet from outside air intakes (HVAC Section) .
C.
Cleanouts: Install cleanouts at intervals as required by Code. All cleanout plugs shall be
recessed brass type.
D.
(1)
Cleanouts to finished floors shall be equal to Josam Series 56000-18-41 (-12,14), bronze plug, "leveleze" adjustable housing and with satin finish bronze cover
and frame. Floor cleanouts in finished spaces shall be set flush and shall have
accessory appurtenances to match type of flooring, such as top recessed for tile,
terrazo cover, carpet marker, etc. Cleanouts in finished walls shall be equal to
Josam Series 58890, with polished stainless steel cover and securing screw.
Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe on which installed. Provide cleanouts at base
of all stacks.
(2)
Extension to floor shall be made with combination "Y" and eighth bends.
Cleanouts inside pipe chases shall be rough brass .
(3)
Cleanouts to grade shall be made with lead caulked cast-iron fittings with brass
countersunk plug, Jossam 58190 set in a 24" square block of poured concrete, 6"
thick. All exterior cleanouts shall be brought to grade. PVC shall not be used for
cleanouts to grade.
Hangers:
(1)
All horizontal suspended soil and vent pipe shall be supported on hangers and
inserts spaced not more than 5'-0" on centers. Hangers on screwed and solder
joint pipe shall be not more than 9'-0" on centers. Hangers on PVC pipe shall be
provided with saddles arranged to prevent damage to pipe, spaced so there will
be NO sagging, and installed as recommended by the manufacturer.
(2)
All materials shall be Standard Catalog items, with rust resistant finish and where
exposed to the weather, shall be hot dip galvanized. Hangers and inserts shall
be in conformance to Federal Specification WW-H-171, Type 1, 10, 11 and 12
hangers for horizontal pipe and Type 8 hangers for vertical pipes. Inserts shall
be Type 18 or 19. Hangers to be used with rods of the following sizes:
Pipe 2" and smaller . . . . . . . . . 3/8" hanger rod
Pipe 2-1/2" to 3-1/2". . . . . . . . 1/2" hanger rod
Pipe 4" and up . . . . . . . . . . . . 5/8" hanger rod
15400-7
Plumbing
All hangers, brackets, rods, nuts, and all hardware shall be painted, if not
galvanized or plated with rust resistant finish.
E.
(3)
Pipe supports or hangers for insulated pipe shall have loops sized to extend
around covering and shall have 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel plate minimum
2 pipe diameters long (outside insulation) between lower part of loop (90 degree
minimum contact) and covering to protect insulation. There shall be no
indentation of the insulation.
(4)
Vertical pipe runs shall. be adequately braced and supported in accordance with
good practice and as directed by the Architect. Provide suitable means to allow
for pipe expansion.
Sleeves, Escutcheons, and Sealing:
(1)
Provide chromium-plated brass escutcheons with set screws to hold plates in
place on all exposed pipes wherever pipes pass through walls, floors and
ceilings, including soil pipe, and including where pipes pass through backs of
cabinets.
(2)
Provide galvanized Schedule 40 pipe sleeves of sufficient size to allow for free
movement of the pipes where pipe pass through floors, foundations and masonry
walls. Sleeves in non-loadbearing partitions, walls, etc., may be 20 gauge
galvanized metal or approved plastic.
(3)
Where pipes pass through rated walls or partitions, and all floors, the space
between pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with an approved fire rated material.
F.
Cast Iron Pipe Joints: Joints shall be made tight using two ounces of packed oakum
tightly caulked with 12 ounces of pure soft pig lead for each joint to each inch diameter of
the pipe, except that a greater amount shall be used on a cut piece of pipe without spigot.
“No-Hub” joints shall be made with approved materials as recommended by the
manufacturer. Draw bands shall be 100% stainless steel. "No-Hub" joints BELOW
FLOOR shall have cast iron and neoprene coupling with Type 304 stainless steel nuts
and bolts as manufactured by MG Coupling, "Clamp-All" coupling, or approved equal:
SUBMIT FOR APPROVAL.
G.
Screwed Pipe Joints: All screwed pipe joints shall be made up tight with approved oil type
thread compound applied to male threads only. All threads shall be full cut, perfect
threads. Any leaks that develop in screwed pipe shall be stopped by partially dismantling
pipe and then tightening leaking joints,, but in no cases shall such a leak be stopped by
caulking. Fuel piping shall have special recommended joint compound.
H.
Solder Joints: All solder joints shall be made with Engelhard "Silvabrite 100" silver
bearing low temperature solder (composition 95.5% tin, 4% copper, 0.5% silver). End of
pipe and inside of fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to application of flux and joints
will be immediately soldered.
I.
Adhesive Joints: All PVC adhesive joints shall be made tight using "adhesive" or
"chemical weld" materials in accordance with fittings manufacturer's instructions. All pipe
and fittings shall be of same manufacturer and same color.
J.
Fittings: Fittings shall be compatible with the system in which installed, welding fittings for
welded pipe (notching or mitering
not allowed), galvanized malleable for
galvanized steel, black malleable for black steel, wrought copper sweat pattern for
15400-8
Plumbing
copper, glued joint (chemical weld) or Ring-Tight bell and spigot for PVC. All changes in
size shall be with reducing fittings, no bushings allowed.
K.
Flashing: All vents shall be run 10" above the roof and shall be flashed and
counterflashed. Flashing shall consist of 16 ounce soft copper or 4 pound sheet lead,
extending all around not less than 8" from the pipe. The counterflashing shall be turned
down into the pipe and shall be made of 16 ounce soft copper or 4 pound sheet lead.
Vents extending through metal roofs and metal building roofs shall be flashed and
counterflashed by the metal roof contractor (or metal building contractor). This
Contractor shall coordinate exact location for the best flashing situation.
1.14
L.
Shock Absorbers: Water supply lines to each fixture or group of fixtures mounted on a
single chase shall be provided with a shock absorber sized in accordance with Plumbing
and Drainage Standard P.D.I.-WH201. Absorbers shall be equal to Josam "Absorbotron"
75000 Series.
M.
All floor drains which do not receive active waste and therefore likely to dry out shall have
a trap primer with water from the nearest suitable fixture in accordance with The
International Plumbing Code 2006. All floor drains shall have "deep seal" traps, 4" water
seal. Trap guards shall also be installed on all floor drains.
N.
All below grade pressure piping which is bell and spigot cast iron or bell and spigot PVC,
including storm drain piping shall have properly sized concrete thrust blocks installed at
every bend, turn, or take-off.
O.
All pipe systems shall have pressure test applied, before any joints are covered (or
buried) or concealed in any manner.
P.
Where any piping is run through structural or other building components such as metal
studs, bar joists, etc., the piping shall be isolated in an approved manner except at
regular support or fastening points.
INSULATION:
A.
General: All insulation work shall be done by a company regularly engaged in and
thoroughly competent in this trade. Failure to finish work neatly, failure to vaporproof
joints, ragged edges, failure to cover all fittings and valves, dents in surfaces, etc., shall
be proper cause to reject the work. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordination
with other trades to assure that he has sufficient space for properly installing his work.
Should it appear that proper space will not be provided, this Contractor shall call same to
the attention of the Architect before such work has progressed beyond the point of
economical correction. Submit materials and procedures for approval.
B.
Provide 18 gauge galvanized steel saddles and high density insulation at support points
to prevent any indentation. All supports except anchors shall be outside insulation.
Insulation anchors to prevent any condensation.
C.
Material shall be performed pipe covering with vapor barrier. The following types of
materials are approved for use as indicated.
(P)
Foamed plastic 1/2" thick, AP 2000 Armaflex or equal (fire rated - 25 and 50).
(U)
Molded urethane 1/2" or 1" thick, as noted Armalock or equal.
(G)
Cellular glass nominal I" thick, Foamglass or equal, with ASJ
(All Service Jacket) where exposed.
(F)
Fiberglass pipe covering with all service jacket (ASJ), 1" thick.
15400-9
Plumbing
D.
All materials used shall be of first line quality and shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the service intended. All insulation materials, including sealer material,
adhesives, finishes, etc., shall have a flame spread classification of not more than 25 and
a smoke developed rating not more than 50. Materials shall be Owens-Corning,
Armstrong, or Pittsburg.
E.
All materials, which are installed in a "UL Rated Assembly" shall meet the requirements
of UL installation in that particular assembly. If any material cannot meet the required fire
hazard rating, the installation is prohibited.
F.
Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for insulation materials
used and materials shall be for the use intended. All fittings, joints, seams, etc., shall be
insulated with material equal. to the pipe insulation, covered with a suitable finish
material, as approved by the Architect. The following lines shall be insulated with the
materials noted:
G.
(1)
All domestic hot water piping above the floor shall be insulated with the above
types (P), (U), or (F), as space allows, except as noted in (4) below. Pipe below
floor shall be type (G) only and be provided with field applied mastic vapor barrier
and glass fabric.
(2)
All domestic cold water piping above finished ceilings or exposed in occupied
space, including Equipment Rooms, use (P), (U), or (F) insulation, except as
noted in (4) below.
(3)
Water cooler trap and waste to stack and drain lines containing air conditioning
condensate from equipment to stack, use type (P) insulation. Use same type for
hot water and waste below handicapped lavatories with two coats of Armaflex
finish. Include all lavatories in public toilets.
(4)
Piping exposed in Utility and Equipment rooms and other work spaces shall be
covered with type (F) where above 8' and with type (G) below 8' above finish
floor, all with a jacket suitable for painting. Cover ells with molded fitting covers
or mitered (minimum 3) segments covered with fabric and coating for smooth
finish, other fittings similar. Installation shall present a neat finished appearance.
(5)
Horizontal rain leaders shall be covered with type (F) and roof drain bodies shall
be wrapped with 1-1/2" thick, 1-1/2 pound density duct wrap, all joints taped.
Finish shall comply with paragraph (4).
(6)
Hot water pipe below grade shall be type (G) only, two 1" thick layers. Apply
waterproof mastic to pipe, all edges and ends of insulation, and fill all voids.
Fasten each layer with stainless steel wire 9" or less on centers, coat outside of
other layer with mastic, imbed layer of glass-fab and coat again with mastic.
Lower into trench after mastic is dry to the touch. Mastic shall not harden to
become brittle. If cold water line parallels hot water, maintain minimum of 18"
clearance between lines (outside of insulation) .
Any failure points noted at year-end inspection shall be completely replaced to the
satisfaction of the Architect.
1.15
1.16
1.17
15400-10
Plumbing
PIPE, EQUIPMENT AND VALVE MARKINGS:
A.
Directions of flow arrows are to be included on each marker, unless otherwise specified.
B.
Equipment Marking: Each item of equipment (such as hot water heaters, pumps, electric
water coolers, etc. where more than one is installed per building) shall have installed a
permanent engraved metal name plate, mechanically fastened (no glue), which will show
the name and number designation from the plans, unless directed otherwise. Mount
name plate in a prominent position, highly visible, or as directed. Engraved plates shall
be Seton Name Plate Corporation, Style 2065-30, for screw mounting. Minimum size
plate - 1” x 3”, minimum size letters - ¼”. Submit a detailed list of name plates for
approval. Mount plate inside removable casing on water coolers.
C.
Valve Marking: Provide all valves (except fixture stops) with sequenced numbered 18
gauge, 1-1/2” diameter brass tags with ½” high stamped or engraved black filled numbers
and ¼” high identification letters, 3/16” top hole, attached with brass “S” hooks, equal to
Seton SBT series. Provide 8-1/2” x 11” printed valve chart in aluminum framed glass
covered holder, and a new set of floor plans marked neatly in contrasting color ink
showing valve locations.
INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT:
A.
Preparations of rough-in, supports, and wall finishes shall be complete and tested and
inspected before fixtures or equipment are installed.
B.
Installation:
(1)
Mechanical or plumbing connections shall be made with correct fittings, gaskets,
or setting compound for each fixture. Seal all brass and trim to walls and fixtures
with resilient waterproof compound as approved by the Architect.
(2)
Electrical work required for connection of equipment provided under this Section
of the specifications shall be in accordance with SECTION: ELECTRICAL. All
motors, starters, and control devices beyond the power outlet or disconnect
switch shall be provided as part of the equipment by this Contractor. All motors
shall be provided with overload protection, manual start-stop control', and
automatic control where shown on plans or where required for proper operation.
Breakers or disconnects shall not be used for start-stop control. All control wiring
and control devices required for operation of equipment furnished by this section
shall be furnished and installed by this section.
START-UP, SERVICE, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE: The Contractor shall put all items
installed under Section into operation and shall instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in all
points requiring service and maintenance. Further, the Contractor shall make all adjustments
and/or perform all service requirements to said equipment during the first year at his expense.
Provide the Owner with three (3) bound sets of operating and maintenance instructions, parts
data books, control diagrams, submittal data, etc., covering the complete installation.
Provide all valves (except fixture stops) with sequence numbered 18 gauge, 1-1/2" diameter
brass tags with 1/2" high stamped or engraved black filled numbers and 1/4" high identification
letters, 3/16" top hole, attached with brass "S" hooks, equal to Seton SBT series. Provide 8-1/2"
x 11" printed valve chart in aluminum framed glass covered holder, and a new set of floor plans
marked neatly in contrasting color ink showing valve locations.
1.18
15400-11
Plumbing
EQUIPMENT PROVIDED BY OTHERS: Including Owner furnished and that specified in other
sections of this specification as Contractor furnished, shall be connected to the plumbing system
in accordance with schedule as noted or as required for equipment items furnished. This
Plumbing Contractor shall provide supplies with stops, indirect waste piping, traps, drain fittings,
etc., as required to connect supply and waste. Where scheduled or noted, he shall also provide
accessories which include faucets and drain fittings.
All equipment connections, water, gas, drain, etc., shall be made full size of the equipment
connection but in no case less than pipe size shown on drawings. Provide a manual stop valve
and a union or flanged connection for each final connection to equipment. All exposed
connections in finished spaces shall be chrome plated brass. Sink continuous waste lines shall
be chrome plated brass.
1.19
1.20
FIXTURE LOCATIONS:
A.
All fixture and equipment locations and mounting heights shall be as shown on the
architectural plans. If no exact location or height is shown, the fixture or equipment shall
be located as directed.
B.
Handicapped requirements shall be in accordance with ANSI A117.1 Standard, unless
shown otherwise. Piping rough-in shall be in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations to match above locations and heights.
C.
Floor drains located in mechanical rooms or spaces, or for specific equipment drains,
shall be located (or relocated from that shown on plans) to best serve that equipment.
Coordinate layout and drain locations with the equipment installing contractor. If floor
drain location is not coordinated and drain is covered by equipment, it will be this
Contractor’s responsibility to relocate drain. Set floor drain strainer approximately ¼”
below finished floor.
FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT: Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, equipment, drains, etc.,
complete with all trim, fittings and other devices which are considered necessary by the trade, by
craft standards, and/or by the Architect. Fixtures and equipment shall be new, without defect,
and shall have manufacturer's name or trademark imprinted on or attached by metallic nameplate
to each. Exposed trim to plumbing fixtures shall be chromium plated. Only one manufacturer's
model number is given in the specification to indicate type and quality required. Similar products
of other nationally known manufacturer's shall be considered equal when so listed in the
"Plumbing Blue Book" as published in Index Creations, Inc. All items listed below shall have
catalog information submitted for approval unless the exact specified item is to be furnished in
which case a letter in six copies could be submitted to the Architect. Submittals shall include
rough-in dimensions. Approval will NOT be given without rough-in dimensions submittal.
A.
Fixtures shall be white and shall be as manufactured by American Standard, Eljer, or
Kohler.
B.
Drains and fixture carriers shall be as manufactured by Josam, Smith, or Wade.
C.
Fixtures shall be as follows (in accordance with drawing symbols):
FIXTURE SCHEDULE
TRAPS: Provide all fixtures with traps of the adjustable type, 17 gauge, chrome plated brass
with cleanout, size to match tailpiece. Plastic (where allowed) or steel adapters shall be within
the wall, completely concealed by the escutcheon, or covered with C.P. brass sleeves. Plastic
traps shall NOT be installed. Traps shall be Brass Craft or American Standard, 17 gauge brass,
15400-12
Plumbing
chrome plated, with cleanout, adjustable, 1-1/4" for lavatories, 1-1/2" f o r sinks. For sinks with 2"
tailpieces, install 2" traps. Lavatories may use 1-1/2" size with 1-1/2" x 1-1/4" adapter nut on the
tail piece. There shall be NO PLASTIC (PVCP EXPOSED below sinks and lavatories.
SUPPLIES: Provide all fixtures with supplies and stops, chrome plated brass with flexible riser
and angle (or straight) pattern stop valves. Equal to Brass Craft R1712A. Install Schedule 40
threaded chrome plated brass nipple extending out of wall to mount stop with threaded
connection. There shall be no compression joints or fittings upstream of the stop valve. All
supplies and stops shall be Brass Craft Nos. - Lavatories: 712A with red brass nipple, length as
required; Tank Type Water Closets: R1712DL with brass nipple. Sinks same as Lavatories. All
sinks, electric water coolers, lavatories, etc shall be equipped with a NSA Model #100SX with a
½” connection as a water filter.
HOLE COVERS AND BOLT CAPS: Chrome plated brass, American Standard 2578.011, for all
unused openings. American Standard 481310 bolt caps for all exposed bolts.
PIPE RIGIDITY: All lines stubbed out for fixture connections shall be made absolutely rigid,
especially at flush valves, service sinks, hose bibbs, and shower head locations. Install extra
blocking, full or short studs, floor anchors, commercial fixture mountings or supports, all as
required for rigidity. Fasten piping with two bolt "C" clamps or other appropriate method. There
shall be no movement of the valves with a 200 lb. pull on that valve.
VANDALPROOF: All items which have optional vandal proofing available from the manufacturer
shall be furnished with the vandalproofing, and all items shall be installed in a vandalproof
manner. All items shall be fastened in a very strong manner and made extremely rigid.
FLUSH VALVES: Exposed flush valves shall have polished hard chrome plated high quality
brass for all exterior parts, all adjusting screws covered with smooth plugs, non-hold open handle,
fully adjustable flow without using the 1" screwdriver stop/check valve, complete with 1-1/2"
vacuum breaker connector, fixture spud escutcheon and securing nut. Dimensions as required
for installation. Flush valves shall be Zurn or Delaney.
FIXTURES:
HWC
Water Closet – Floor mounted, 17-1/2” high rim, elongated, white, vitreous china, 1.6 gpf,
12” rough-in, 1-1/2” top spud, equal to Kohler “Highcliff” K-4368. Seat to be open-front
with anti-microbial compound equal to Kohler “Lustra” K-4670-CA, flush valves to be
Sloan Royal 111 flush valve for 1.6 gpf.
WC
Water Closet – Water Closet – Floor mounted, 14-3/4” high rim, elongated, white,
vitreous china, 1.6 gpf, 12” rough-in, 1-1/2” top spud, equal to Kohler “Wellcomme” K4349. Seat to be open-front with anti-microbial compound equal to Kohler “Lustra” K4670-CA, flush valves to be Sloan Royal 111.
HL
Handicap Lavatory – Wall mounted, white, vitreous china, 21”x18”, drilled for concealed
arm carrier, 4” centers, pop-up drain, ADA compliant, equal to Kohler “Kingston” K-2005.
Faucet to be Kohler “Coralais” K-15182 faucet, complete with one-piece self-contained
ceramic disk valve, high-temperature limit stop, 2.2 gpm, tail piece and grid drain. Carrier
to be equal to Jossam floor mounted carrier with bearing plate constructed for concealed
arm lavatory. Provide trap wrap and supply wrap.
S-1
Sink – Stainless steel with Silent Shield plus sound-absorption system, self-rimming,
20”x20”x8”, 18 gauge, P-Trap, Duostrainer K-8813, equal to Kohler “Staccato” K-3363-3,
faucet Kohler “Antique” K-118-4, angle stops, braided stainless steel supplies, gooseneck
faucet with wristblade handles.
15400-13
Plumbing
S-2
Double Sink – Stainless steel, double compartment sink, 8” deep basin, strainers,
tailpieces, p-traps, self-rimming, equal to Kohler “Cadence” K-3145-4. Complete with
Kohler “Coralais” K-15072-P chrome swing spout faucet with 9-1/4” reach, ADA
compliant lever handle, flexible supplies, matching side spray, ceramic disc valves, lever
handles, polished chrome finish and black handspray.
HBE
Hose Bibb, Exterior - Chrome plated non-freeze wall hydrant with backflow preventer,
automatic draining, tamper-resistant tee key operated hydrant mounted in wall box.
Equal to Watts Model No. HY42B-04.
HBI
Hose Bibb, Interior – Chrome plated wall faucet with backflow preventer, automatic
draining. Equal to Woodford Model No. 24 with keyed handle operation.
MS
Mop Sink – Fiat molded stone mop basin, with S.S. dome strainer, Fiat MSB-2424 with E77-AA protective cap. Provide Chicago Faucet 917-RCF, screwdriver stops, with vacuum
breaker and brace on the spout. Hose with wall bracket 832AA.
RIM
Ice Maker Wall Box - Specialty Products P4129 ice maker box with domestic brass valve
and box with face plate.
WM
WASHER BOX: Recessed box, powder coated white, equal to Guy Gray FR-12 with
capped drain and single lever shut off valves. Provide stainless steel braided hoses for
connection.
HEWC Handicap Electric Water Cooler – Stainless steel finish, split level, vandal-resistant
double bubbler, mounted at ADA requirements, ADA approved, 8 GPH, UL Listed, equal
to Halsey Taylor.
FD
Floor Drain – Cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, flashing collar,
adjustable stainless steel top, polished strainer, full pipe size, Zurn Z453B. Install 4"
deep seal traps on all floor drains. Install trap guards in addition to trap primers. Strainer
size shall be 6”, 7", and 8" diameter respectively for 2”, 3", and 4" size drains. Install with
trap primer connection and trap guard.
FS
Floor Sink – 12”x12”x8” square cast iron sanitary floor area and indirect waste drain
complete with white acid resistant enamel coated interior, loose set acid resistant enamel
coated cast iron grate and aluminum done bottom strainer equal to MIFAB FA1732,3,4
for 2” through 4” drains. Provide ¾ grate cover.
TP
Trap Primer – Bronze primer valve with automatic vacuum breaker, to automatically
maintain trap seal in drain by a discharge with each change in line pressure, chrome
plated, union connections, Josam 1465-10-91. Install just below lavatory, sink, or as
shown, exposed for access, or provide access door if installed concealed in wall or
chase. Install on all drains which do not receive active waste in accordance with the
Plumbing Code whether shown or not. (See detail on drawings.)
SA
Shock Absorber – Enclosed (sealed) brass diaphragm type sized in accordance with PDIWH201, Josam "Absorbotron" 75000 series.
SH
Shower – Shower trim shall include Shower to be ADA compliant, fold-up seat, brushed
stainless steel grab bars, shower drain equal to Kohler “Freewill” K-12101-C. Faucet –
Rite-Temp pressure-balancing single-control shower faucet trim shall be of brass
construction. Bath and shower trim shall include showerhead with arm and flange, and
faceplate with handle. Faucet trim shall be Kholer “Revival” K-T16116-4A and Rite-Temp
15400-14
Plumbing
pressure-balancing single-control valve shall feature a brass valve body. The valve shall
mix the water from the “off” position, through the “cold” to the “hot”, and includes a hightemperature limit stop. The pressure-balancing mechanism shall be of one-piece
diaphragm cartridge design for ease of maintenance, with screwdriver stops. Rite-Temp
valve shall be Kohler Model K-305-KS-NA. Hand-held shower to have minimum 48”
stainless steel flexible connector to be diverted from standard head for ADA compliance
with 36” sliding stainless steel grab bar.
IGWH Instantaneous Gas Water Heater - Water Heater(s) shall be externally mounted,
instantaneous, multiple point-of-use, gas fired, direct vent, water heater(s) design
certified to the ANSI Z21.10.3 standard for gas fired water heaters. Each Water Heater
shall produce no more than 55 ppm NOx emissions when tested in accordance with the
Rules and Regulations of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD).
Said water heater(s) shall be configured to operate with natural gas and a 120 volt/60 Hz
AC power source. Unit(s) shall have a BTU input range of 15,000 BTU/hr to 199,000
BTU/hr, a minimum recovery efficiency rating of 82%, a minimum hot water outlet
capacity of 9.4 gallon per minute (with a 45 °F temperature rise), and a minimum
operating flow rate of 0.6 gallon per minute (with a 50 °F temperature rise). Water
Heater(s) shall be microprocessor controlled and utilize a direct electronic ignition system
(with no standing pilot), fully modulating gas control valve, turbine flow meter, automatic
electro-mechanical water flow control valve, and water temperature thermistors to
maintain outlet water temperature between ± 2 °F of setpoint temperature. Unit(s) shall
incorporate the following internal safety devices: flame failure lockout, boiling protection
lockout, thermal overheat protection, internal freeze protection for ambient temperatures
as low as –30 °F, and lockout protection in the event of a blocked flue. Water Heater(s)
shall be provided with a remote temperature thermostat with an adjustable setpoint range
of 96 °F to 120 °F, but shall be capable of utilizing optional remote temperature
thermostat controller(s) to provide an adjustable setpoint range of 96 °F to 140 °F.
Unit(s) shall also be capable of storing and displaying up to 9 diagnostic maintenance
codes, via the display on the remote temperature thermostat controller(s). Water
Heater(s) shall have a copper heat exchanger warranted against material defects or
workmanship for a minimum period of 10 years from the date of purchase. Unit(s) shall
have stainless steel burners, solid brass water flow control valve, and solid brass inlet
and outlet water connections. These and all other parts shall be warranted against
material defects or workmanship for a minimum period of 5 years from the date of
purchase. Water heater shall be equal to Rinnai as scheduled on drawings.
(End of Section 15400)
OKALOOSA COUNTY, FLORIDA
SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I.
GENERAL
1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS: The Electrical General Requirements are supplementing and
applicable to Division 16 Sections and shall apply to all phases of work specified herein, shown on
the Drawings, or required to provide a complete installation of electrical systems. Section 16 is
sub-divided for convenience only. Associated work specified in other Sections:
16050 – Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
16100 – Wiring Methods
16200 – Electrical Power and Distribution
16231 – Package Engine Generator
16289 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppression System
16500 – Lighting
Division 15 – HVAC
2.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:
A.
STANDARDS AND CODES: The electrical installation shall comply with all applicable
building codes: local, state, federal ordinances, and the 2011 edition of the National
Electrical Code. In case of a discrepancy among these applicable regulatory codes and
ordinances, the most stringent requirement shall govern. The Contractor shall notify the
TPM in writing of any such discrepancy. Should the Contractor perform any work that does
not comply with the applicable regulatory codes and ordinances he shall bear all cost arising
in correcting the deficiencies. Application standards and codes shall include all local
ordinances, all state laws, and the applicable requirements of the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association - NEMA
State Requirements for Educational Facilities - SREF
The Life Safety Code – NFPA 101, 2012 Edition
American National Standards Institute - ANSI
Florida Building Code, Latest Edition
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. – UL
National Fire Protection Association – NFPA (latest editions)
Any codes that are not mentioned above that are required by the local jurisdiction, do not
relinquish responsibility of the contractor to follow codes specified by the local jurisdiction.
B.
SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS: The drawings and these specifications complement
each other. What is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Omissions
from the drawings and specifications of details of work which are evidently necessary to
carry out the intent of the drawings and specifications, or which are customarily performed,
shall not relieve the Contractor from performing such work. In any case of discrepancy in
the figures or catalog numbers, the matter shall be submitted to the TPM, who shall
promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor shall be at the
Contractor's own risk and expense. Electrical drawings are diagrammatic only. Do not
scale these drawings. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and any conflicting data shall be verified before bidding.
C.
FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS: This Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits,
and inspections required on work performed under this section of the Specifications. He
shall assume full responsibility for all assessments and taxes necessary for the completion
and acceptance of the work.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
16000 - 1
D.
LETTERS CERTIFYING COMPLIANCE AND REVIEW: The Contractor's bid shall be
accompanied by a letter stating that these Documents will be revised, as required by any
legal authority having jurisdiction and by any serving utility, with no additional cost to the
Owner. As soon as practical after bidding, and before any work is commenced, the
Contractor shall meet with all legal authorities having jurisdiction, review all materials and
details of this project and agree on any required revisions.
A letter shall be written to the TPM listing the names, dates, places of such review, and the
revisions required (at no additional cost). A copy of the letter shall also be sent to the
reviewing authority. The Contractor shall also meet with each serving utility and repeat the
above procedure. A letter certifying each meeting shall be written also with the information
as described above. The letter from the telephone and cable television utilities shall address
approval for site and internal building cable types.
The Contractor shall after completion of the work, furnish the TPM a certificate of final
inspection and approval from the applicable local inspection department. Make necessary
changes to plans and specifications to meet code standards at no additional cost to the
Owner.
3.
EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS: All utilities, existing system and conditions shown on the plans as
existing is approximate, and the Contractor shall verify before any work is started. Before
submitting proposals, each bidder should visit the site and fully familiarize himself with all job
conditions and shall be fully informed as to the extent of his work. No consideration will be given
after bid opening date for alleged misunderstanding as to the requirements of work involved in
connecting to the utilities or as to requirements of materials to be furnished. Part of the work
specified is to Fire Caulk all conduits entering and leaving the new fire rated hallways. Also, all
wires and cables not in conduit shall be sleeved and fire caulked to match the fire rating of the
adjacent wall.
4.
INTERRUPTIONS AND SERVICE
5.
A.
SCHEDULED INTERRUPTIONS: Planned interruptions of utilities service, to any facility
affected by this contract, shall be carefully planned and approved by TPM at least ten (10)
days in advance of the requested interruption. The Contractor shall not interrupt services
until the TPM has granted specific approval. The request shall indicate services to be
affected, date and time of interruption and duration of outage. Request for interruption of
service will not be approved until all equipment and materials required for the completion of
that particular phase of work are on the job site. The work may have to be scheduled after
normal working hours.
B.
ACCIDENTAL INTERRUPTIONS: All excavation and/or remodeling work required shall be
performed with care so as not to interrupt other existing services (water, gas, electrical,
sewer, sprinklers, etc.). If accidental utility interruption resulting from work performed by the
Contractor occurs, service shall be immediately restored to its original condition without
delay, by and at the expense of the Contractor, using skilled workmen of the trade required.
C.
MAINTAINING SERVICE:
(1)
Any existing service (or operating system) which must be interrupted for any length
of time shall be supplied with a temporary service if necessary for continuation of the
normal operation of this facility.
(2)
Any existing system or part of an existing system currently in operation shall remain
so after all additions or renovations are made and all work is completed.
COORDINATION:
16000 - 2
A.
COORDINATING WITH OTHER CRAFTS: It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to
cooperate and coordinate with all other crafts working on this project. This Contractor shall
do all cutting, trenching, backfill and structural removals to permit entry of the electrical
system components. The General Contractor shall do all patching and finishing. The TPM's
representative shall render a decision in writing as to space allotment in congested areas.
No claims for "extras" due to such decisions shall be allowed, even though the work has
already been installed. When the Contractor submits for approval any item or equipment,
he shall determine for himself whether or not it will fit the space provided. If, after installation
of any equipment, wiring or other items, it is determined that ample maintenance or passage
space has not been provided, then the Contractor shall rearrange this work and/or furnish
other equipment even though the equipment installed has been approved. A 1/2" = 1'0"
scaled drawing of the main building equipment rooms along with elevations of each wall
shall be submitted with the electrical shop drawings showing the proposed location of all
equipment in each room.
B.
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT:
(1) The Contractor shall furnish all branch circuit wiring to motors and control panels or
centers of heating and air conditioning equipment including disconnects, receptacles,
switches, and appurtenances to which the system at the units may be connected, to
provide a complete system of wiring for power. Control equipment and control circuit
wiring is specified in the Mechanical Section. The electrical contractor shall make all
power terminations to equipment supplied by others.
(2) Control devices to be included in the branch circuit, except those furnished integral with
the equipment, will be delivered by the Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor and
installed by the Electrical Contractor.
C.
6.
EQUIPMENT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS: This Contractor shall furnish and
install, complete electrical roughing-in and connections to all equipment furnished under
other sections and indicate on drawings. This includes all outlets as shown on mechanical
and electrical drawings. All such equipment shall be set in place as work of other sections.
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT APPROVAL:
A.
PRIOR-SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall base his proposal on the materials specified
herein and on the drawings. Reference to a particular product by manufacturer, trade name,
or catalog number establishes the quality standards of material and equipment required for
this installation and is not intended to exclude products equal in quality and similar design.
The TPM reserves the sole right to decide the equality of materials proposed for use in lieu
of these specified. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish the information and
data sufficient to establish the quality and utility of the items in question, including furnishing
of samples if required. If other equipment manufacturers determine that their equipment will
fit in the space and meet the recommended clearances, suit all job conditions, equal or
exceed the quality of the specified items, then a request may be made in writing to the TPM
at least ten (10) days prior to bid date for permission to be included in the approved
equipment list. All data required for evaluation shall accompany the above letter.
B.
SUBMITTALS:
(1)
Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit a list of items proposed for use. He
shall also submit catalog data and shop drawings on proposed systems and their
components, panelboards, safety switches, starters and contactors, transformers,
lighting fixtures, and wiring devices. Where substitutions alter the design or space
requirements, the Contractor shall defray all items of cost for the revised design and
construction including costs to all allied trades involved. Data shall be submitted
within thirty (30) days after the contract is awarded. Provide eight (8) copies of shop
16000 - 3
drawings as a minimum unless the General Conditions require a greater number of
copies. Each submittal data section shall be covered with an index sheet listing
Contractor, supplier, etc., and an index to the enclosed submittals.
(2)
As-Built Drawings: Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall furnish a
complete set of the drawings which formed a part of the contract and include all
revisions, sketches, etc., which may have been required during the construction.
(3)
Operating and Maintenance Manuals: At completion of the work, furnish three (3)
copies of written operation instructions which shall include manufacturer's
descriptive bulletins, operating and maintenance manuals and parts lists of all
equipment installed. Also include in such instructions, the specified size and
capacity ratings of all equipment installed. Each set of instructions shall be
assembled into a suitable loose-leaf type binder and presented to the TPM for
delivery to the Owner.
(4)
Each major section of submittals such as power, equipment, lighting equipment, fire
alarm, etc., shall be secured in a booklet or stapled with a covering index which lists
the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
(5)
General contractor w/phone number and project manager.
Sub-contractor w/phone number and project manager.
Supplier of equipment w/phone number and person responsible for this
project.
Index of each item covered in submittal and model number.
Any deviation from contract documents shall be specifically noted on
submittal cover index and boldly on specific submittal sheet.
Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Sprinkler, and Electrical Coordination:
The electrical power equipment submittals shall be accompanied by a letter
verifying coordination of electrical services for all mechanical, plumbing, and fire
protection sprinkler equipment requiring power. The letter, addressed to the
general contractor, shall include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Mechanical, plumbing, and fire sprinkler items that require power
The full load amps of each item
Whether the item is single or three phase
The minimum and maximum overcurrent protection
The proposed breaker size
The proposed circuit
The number of electrical connections
The letter should be in an organized format so that it is easy to read and decipher
information by all parties involved.
All relevant contractors (mechanical,
plumbing, and fire sprinkler) shall review this letter and sign it before delivery to
the general contractor.
7.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF PRODUCTS: Take necessary precautions to protect all
material, equipment, apparatus and work from damage before, during, and after installation. Failure
to do so to the satisfaction of the TPM will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the material,
equipment or work in question. Contractor is responsible for the safety and good condition of the
materials installed until final acceptance by the owner. Conduit openings shall be capped or plugged
during installation to maintain cleanliness. Fixtures and equipment shall be tightly covered and
protected against dirt, moisture, chemical and mechanical injury. At the completion of the work the
fixtures, material and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in condition satisfactory
to the TPM.
16000 - 4
8.
WORKMANSHIP: All work shall be executed in a neat and substantial manner by skilled
workman, well qualified, and regularly engaged in the type of work required. Substandard work
shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
9.
TESTING AND BALANCING: Make tests that may be required by the Owner or the TPM in
connection with the operation of the electrical system in the buildings. Balance all single-phase loads
connected to all panelboards in the buildings to insure approximate equal divisions of these loads on
the main secondary power supply serving the buildings. All tests shall be made in accordance with
the latest standards of the IEEE and the NEC. The installation shall be tested for performance,
grounds and insulation resistance. A "megger" type instrument shall be used. Contractor shall
perform circuit continuity and operational tests on all equipment furnished or connected by
Contractor. The tests shall be made in the presence of the TPM or his representative. The
Contractor shall notify the TPM at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of tests. The Contractor
shall provide all testing equipment and all costs shall be borne by him. Written reports shall be made
of all tests. All faults shall be corrected immediately.
A letter shall be written giving the following:
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS:
A.
11.
Measured amps on each phase of each panel.
Resistance to ground of each grounding electrode.
Measured voltage phase to phase and phase to neutral at each panel.
Ground continuity and polarity instrument used.
Upon completion of the work and at the time designated, the services of one project
engineer shall be provided by the Contractor to instruct the representative of the Owner in
the operation and maintenance of the systems.
GUARANTEE AND SERVICE: Upon completion of all tests and acceptance, the Contractor shall
furnish the Owner a written guarantee covering the electrical work done for a period of one (1) year
from date of acceptance. Guarantee includes equipment capacity and performance ratings specified
without excessive noise levels. Upon notice from the TPM or the Owner, the Contractor shall, during
the guarantee period, rectify and replace any defective material or workmanship and repair any
damage caused thereby without additional cost.
16000 - 5
SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
I.
GENERAL
1.
SECTION INCLUDES:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Supports
Excavation, Trenching, and Backfilling
Cutting and Patching
Equipment Connection
Identification of Equipment
Cleaning and Painting
Salvaged Materials
Grounding and Bonding
II.
PRODUCTS
1.
SUPPORTS:
2.
A.
FRAMING STEEL: Galvanized or painted rolled steel of standard shapes and sizes.
B.
MANUFACTURED CHANNEL: Hot dipped galvanized with all hardware required for
mounting as manufactured by Unistrut, Steel City, or approved equal.
C.
MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE: Standard sizes treated for corrosion resistance.
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
NAMEPLATES: Laminated black micarta with ¼” high engraved white letters.
B.
PANEL DIRECTORIES: Typewritten under plastic cover.
C.
WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS: Cloth, split sleeve, or tubing type.
D.
GROUNDING MATERIALS
(1).
GROUND ROD: 16 feet x ¾” diameter, copper clad steel, sectional driven.
(2).
GROUND CONNECTORS: Approved ground clamp manufactured of cast bronze
construction with matching bolts, nuts, and washers.
(3).
EXOTHERMIC WELDS: Materials shall be from the same source.
process shall be Cadweld or approved equal.
(4).
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: Green colored and coded insulated copper (#12
AWG minimum) or bare soft drawn copper as indicated on Drawings.
III.
EXECUTION
1.
INSTALLATION:
instructions.
A.
Products
shall
be
installed
in
accordance
with
Welding
manufacturer’s
SUPPORT SYSTEMS shall be sized and fastened to accommodate weight of equipment
and conduit, including wiring, which they carry.
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16050 - 1
B.
C.
(1)
Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet junction boxes to building
structure using precast insert system, expansion anchors, preset inserts, beam
clamps, or spring steel clips.
(2)
Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum
board partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry
walls; self-drilling anchors or expansion and anchors on concrete surfaces; sheet
metal screws in sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.
(3)
Do not fasten supports to piping, ceiling support wires, ductwork, mechanical
equipment, or conduit.
(4)
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
(5)
Do not drill structural steel members without written consent from the Architect.
(6)
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel.
(7)
Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
(8)
Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinets one inch off wall in wet
locations.
(9)
Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
(10)
Install freestanding electrical equipment on concrete pads. Concrete pad shall be
4” high and 4” larger than footprint of electrical equipment.
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING shall be accomplished as indicated on
the Drawings or where required to install systems and/or equipment.
(1)
Trenches for all underground conduits or equipment shall be excavated to the
required depths. Where soft, wet, or unstable soil is encountered, the bottom of
the trench shall be filled with 6 inches of compacted gravel and sand fill. All
trench bottoms shall be tamped hard. Trenches shall be shored as required to
meet OSHA requirements and general safe working conditions.
(2)
After conduits or equipment have been inspected and approved by the Architect
and prior to backfilling, all forms shall be removed and the excavation shall be
cleaned of all trash and debris. Material for backfilling shall consist of the
excavation, or borrow of sand, gravel, or other materials approved by the
Engineer and shall be free of trash, lumber or other debris. Backfill shall be
placed in horizontal layers, not exceeding 9 inches in depth and properly
moistened to approximate optimum requirements.
Each layer shall be
compacted by hand, or machine tamped to a density equivalent to surrounding
soil. Backfill shall be brought to suitable elevation above ground to provide for
anticipated settlement and shrinkage. All paving broken up shall be repaired and
returned to the original condition.
CUTTING AND PATCHING: This Contractor shall provide all cutting, digging, etc.,
incident to his work and shall make all required repairs thereafter to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, but in no case shall the Contractor cut into any major structural element, beam,
or column without written approval of the Engineer.
16050 - 2
D.
E.
(1)
Pavements, sidewalks, roads, curbs, walls, ceilings, floors, and roofs shall be
sawcut, patched, repaired and/or replaced as required to permit the installation of
the electrical work. Existing concrete floors and other slabs, which require
vertical piercing for installation of conduit raceways shall be neatly core drilled.
The Contractor shall carefully lay out his drilling in advance and arrange it to
minimize exposed work.
(2)
The Contractor shall bear the expense of all cutting, patching, painting, repairing,
or replacing of the work of other trades required because of his fault, error, or
tardiness or because of any damage done by him.
(3)
All patching, and finishing shall be performed by the General Contractor at this
Contractor’s expense.
Make electrical connections to equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s
instructions.
(1)
Verify that wiring and outlet rough-in work is complete and that equipment is ready
for electrical connection, wiring, and energization.
(2)
Make wiring connections in control panel or in wiring compartment of pre-wired
equipment. Provide interconnecting wiring where indicated.
(3)
Install and connect disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control
devices as indicated.
(4)
Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquid-tight
flexible conduit in damp or wet locations.
(5)
Install pre-fabricated cord set where connections with attachment plug is indicated
or specified, or use attachment plug with suitable strain-relief clamps.
(6)
Provide suitable strain-relief clamps for cord connections to outlet boxes and
equipment connection boxes.
Identify electrical distribution and control equipment, and loads served, to meet regulatory
requirements and as specified herein.
(1)
Degrease and clean surface to receive nameplates.
(2)
Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws or rivets with edges parallel
to equipment lines.
(3)
Each new and existing panel shall have an external nameplate. Electric meters,
disconnect switches, starters or similar devices shall have a micarta engraved
nameplate mechanically affixed indicating the load served and the location, such
as “A/C 2” or “A/C 3 above ceiling”. Letters shall be ¼” white on a black
background. Panels shall be designated in this manner:
“Panel A
120/208 Volts
3 Phase 4 Wire
Served from Panel MP”
(4)
Panel directories shall accurately indicate load served and location of load.
16050 - 3
(5)
F.
Engrave plates as indicated on the Drawings.
Raceway junction boxes for each system shall be identified by painting the inside of the
junction box cover for exposed work and both sides of the covers for concealed work
according to the following code:
Receptacle Circuits
120 V. Lighting Circuits
120/208 V. Power & Misc.
Black
White
Green
If the established color code at this site conflicts with the above, the contractor shall so
state in a letter outlining his proposed colors to maintain conformity
G.
H.
Install wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, boxes, and at load
connections.
(1)
Use distribution panel and branch circuit or feeder number to identify power and
lighting circuits.
(2)
Use control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams
or equipment manufacturer’s shop drawings to identify control wiring.
CLEANING AND PAINTING: The respective Contractors for the various phases of work
shall clear away all debris, surplus materials, etc., resulting form their work or operations,
leaving the job and equipment furnished in the clean first class condition.
(1)
All fixtures and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of plaster, stickers, rust,
stains and other foreign matter or discoloration, leaving every part in an
acceptable condition ready for use.
(2)
The Contractor shall refinish and restore to the original condition and appearance,
all electrical equipment, which has sustained damage to manufacturer’s prime
and finish coats or enamel or paint. Materials and workmanship shall be equal to
the requirements described for other painting.
(3)
Where exposed conduits or raceways are shown or permitted, they shall be
painted to match adjacent finished surfaces.
I.
SALVAGED MATERIALS: Materials and equipment removed from the construction site
shall remain the property of the Owner. This contractor shall remove and store materials
until directed by the Owner as to disposition. Materials may be salvaged by the Owner at
his discretion or disposed of by the contractor as directed by the Owner.
J.
Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non-current-carrying metallic
parts of electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, and service neutral of the
electrical system shall be grounded.
(1)
Equipment grounding shall be accomplished by installing a separate grounding
conductor in each raceway of the system. The Conductor shall be provided with
a distinctive green insulation or marker and shall be sized in accordance with
Article 250 of the National Electrical Code.
(2)
The electrical system grounding electrode connection shall be made at the main
service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic
cold water service. A suitable ground clamp shall make connection to the water
pipe. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made on the street
16050 - 4
side of the flange connection. If the metallic water service is coated with an
insulating material or there is no metallic water service to the building, ground
connection shall be made to additional ground rods as required by resistance
tests, at the exterior of the building driven full length into the earth.
(3)
The maximum resistance of the driven ground shall be tested with a ground
resistance Megger and shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions.
If this cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional or parallel rods shall be
installed 7’-6” on center until 25 ohms or less is achieved without connection to
the building water piping. A typewritten test report shall be written.
16050 - 5
SECTION 16100 - WIRING METHODS
I.
GENERAL
1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
2.
Section 16000 – Electrical General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this
Section, with additions and modifications specified herein.
SECTION INCLUDES:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
Conduit and Conduit Fittings
Electrical Boxes and Fittings
Wireway
Surface Non-Metallic Raceway
Service Fittings
Wire and Cable
Wiring Devices
II.
PRODUCTS
1.
CONDUIT AND FITTINGS:
A.
B.
2.
CONDUIT:
(1)
Metal conduit: Galvanized steel.
(2)
Metal tubing: Galvanized steel.
(3)
Flexible Conduit: Steel.
(4)
Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
(5)
Plastic Conduit and Tubing: NEMA TC 2; PVC. Use Schedule 40 conduit.
(6)
Contractor shall provide 5% additional conduit in the project for user directed
outlets.
CONDUIT FITTINGS:
(1)
Conduit Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1. Conduit fittings to be steel
threaded type.
(2)
Tubing Fittings: NEMA FB 1. Tubing fittings to be steel compression type for
conduit up to 2” in diameter and set screw type for conduit 2-1/2” and larger.
(3)
Flexible Conduit Fittings: NEMA FB 1. Flexible conduit fittings to be steel set screw
or screw-in type.
(4)
Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: NEMA FB 1.
fittings to be steel compression type.
(5)
Plastic Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.
Liquid-tight flexible conduit
ELECTRICAL BOXES:
WIRING SYSTEMS
16100 - 1
A.
3.
4.
BOXES:
(1)
Sheet Metal: NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel 4” or 4-11/16” square.
galvanized plaster/tile ring for recessed outlet boxes.
Provide
(2)
Cast Metal: Aluminum or cast ferroalloy, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded
hubs.
(3)
Nonmetallic: NEMA OS 2.
B.
FLOOR BOXES for Installation in Cast-in-Place Concrete Floors: Fully adjustable, cast
iron.
C.
LARGE ENCLOSURES: NEMA 250; Type 4, steel enclosures with manufacturer’s
standard enamel finish and cover, held closed screws.
D.
LARGE CAST METAL BOXES:
(1)
Surface-mounted Type: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface
mounted junction box; galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum box and cover with
ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.
(2)
Underground Type: NEMA 250; Type 4 flanged, recessed cover box for flush
mounting; galvanized cast iron box and plain cover with neoprene gasket and
stainless steel cover screw.
WIREWAY:
A.
ENCLOSURE: General purpose or raintight type with knockouts.
B.
COVER: Screw type with full gasketing.
C.
FITTINGS: Lay-in type with removable cover and drip shield for outdoor
installation.
D.
FINISH: Rust inhibiting primer coating with enamel finish.
SURFACE NON-METALLIC RACEWAY:
A.
EQUAL MANUFACTURERS: Panduit, Wiremold, or Hubbell Premise.
B.
MATERIAL: The raceway and all system components must be UL Listed and exhibit
nonflammable self-extinguishing characteristics, tested to comparable specifications of
UL94V-0.
C.
RACEWAY: Two-piece design with a base and snap-on cover. The raceway shall be
available with and without multiple wiring channels formed by adding divider walls in the
base. The raceway shall be capable of having one, two, or three compartments.
D.
FITTINGS: A full compliment of fittings must be available and supplied to provide a
complete raceway system including but not limited to flat, internal and external elbows,
tees, entrance fittings, cover clips, and end caps. The fittings shall overlap the cover and
base to hide uneven cuts.
E.
COLOR: The raceway shall be available in a variety of colors.
WIRING SYSTEMS
16100 - 2
5.
SERVICE FITTINGS:
A.
6.
(1)
Cover material: Brass.
(2)
Duplex Convenience Receptacle: Duplex flap opening hinged with holding screw.
(3)
Communications: 2-1/8” X 1” combination threaded opening.
(4)
Provide brass finish protective rings and carpet flanges.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
B.
C.
7.
FLUSH FLOOR BOX COVERS:
BUILDING WIRE:
(1)
Feeder and Branch Circuits 10 AWG and Smaller: Copper, solid conductors, 600
volt insulation, THWN.
(2)
Feeder and Branch Circuits 8 AWG and Larger: Copper, stranded (except as
permitted or required by the NEC) conductors, 600 volt insulation, THHN, THHW, or
THWN unless specified on drawings.
(3)
Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductors, 600 volt insulation, THHN, THHW,
or THWN.
(4)
Contractor shall provide 5% additional wire in the project for user directed outlets.
REMOTE CONTROL SIGNAL CABLE:
(1)
Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
600 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted together,
shielded, and covered with PVC jacket.
(2)
Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper
conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 60 degree C, individual conductors twisted
together, shielded, and covered with PVC jacket; UL listed.
CORDS:
Oil – resistant thermoset insulated multi – conductor flexible cord with
identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for extra hard usage in damp
locations.
WIRING DEVICES AND WALLPLATES:
A.
B.
MANUFACTURERS:
(1)
Hubbell.
(2)
Pass and Seymour.
(3)
Slater.
WALL SWITCHES: AC general use, quiet – operating snap switch rated 20 amperes and
120/277 volts AC, with plastic toggle handle.
(1)
WIRING SYSTEMS
Single Pole Switch: Hubbell 1221
16100 - 3
C.
(2)
Double Pole Switch: Hubbell 1222
(3)
Three Way Switch: Hubbell 1223
(4)
Four Way Switch: Hubbell 1224
(5)
Pilot Light Type: Lighted handle, Model 1221-PL manufactured by Hubbell.
(6)
Color to be selected by Architect from standard colors.
RECEPTACLE:
(1)
Convenience Receptacle Configuration: Type 5-20R, plastic face. Model 5362
manufactured by Hubbell or equal.
(2)
Specific Purpose Receptacle: Configuration indicated on Drawings.
(3)
Provide straight-blade receptacles to NEMA WD 1.
(4)
Provide locking-blade receptacles to NEMA WD 5.
(5)
GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault
current interrupter. Model GF-5362 manufactured by Hubbell.
(6)
Color to be selected by Architect from standard colors.
(7)
Contractor shall provide 5% additional receptacles in the project for user directed
outlets
D.
WALL DIMMER: Rating of 2000 watts at 120 volts, AC.
E.
DECORATIVE COVER PLATE: Stainless steel.
F.
WEATHERPROOF COVER PLATE: Gasketed cast metal with hinged gasketed device
covers rated raintight while in use on accordance with Article 410-57 of the National
Electrical Code.
F.
ATTACHMENT PLUG CAP: Match receptacle configuration provided for equipment
connection.
III.
EXECUTION
1.
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION:
A.
Examine supporting surfaces to determine that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Electrical boxes shown on Drawings are approximate locations unless dimensioned.
Obtain verification from Architect/Engineer of locations of outlets prior to rough-in. Outlets
may be relocated to a distance of ten feet prior to rough-in with no additional cost to the
Owner.
C.
Verify that interior of building has been physically protected from weather.
D.
Verify that mechanical work which is likely to injure conductors has been completed.
WIRING SYSTEMS
16100 - 4
G.
2.
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
C.
WIRING SYSTEMS
Use conduit and tubing for raceways in the following locations:
(1)
Underground Installations: Schedule 40PVC with rigid steel bends. Rigid steel
conduit shall be painted with two coats of epoxy asphaltic paint.
(2)
Installations in Concrete: Schedule 40 PVC with rigid steel bends with approval
from Structural Engineer. Rigid steel conduit shall be painted with two coats of
epoxy asphaltic paint.
(3)
Exposed Outdoor Locations: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
(4)
Wet Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
threaded or raintight fittings for conduit.
(5)
Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
(6)
Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Rigid steel conduit or electrical metallic tubing.
(7)
Feeders: Galvanized rigid steel conduit on all feeders.
Use
Size raceways for conductor type installed.
(1)
Minimum Size Conduit: ¾” in underground locations, ½” in all other locations.
(2)
Maximum Size Conduit in Slab Above Grade: 1 – inch; do not route conduits
larger than ¾” to cross each other.
Arrange conduit and tubing to maintain headroom and to present a neat mechanical
appearance.
(1)
Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping.
(2)
Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance to piping and 12 inch clearance to heat
surfaces such as flues, steam piping, and heating appliances.
(3)
Maintain required fire, acoustic, and vapor barrier rating when penetrating walls,
floors, and ceilings.
(4)
Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible;
otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket.
(5)
Group in parallel runs where practical. Use rack constructed of steel channel.
Maintain spacing between raceways or de-rate circuit ampacities to NFPA 70
requirements.
(6)
Use conduit hangers and clamps; do not fasten with wire or perforated pipe
straps.
(7)
Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction.
(8)
Terminate all conduits with insulated bushings.
16100 - 5
D.
E.
F.
WIRING SYSTEMS
(9)
Use suitable caps to protect installed raceway against entrance of moisture and
dirt.
(10)
Provide a pull cord in all empty raceways.
(11)
Install expansion joint fittings where raceway crosses building expansion joints.
(12)
Install plastic conduit and tubing in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. When plastic conduit is installed, use galvanized rigid elbows
for 90 degree bends.
Install electrical boxes as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire
pulling, equipment connections and regulatory requirements.
(1)
Use cast outlet box in exterior locations, wet locations, and exposed interior
locations
(2)
Use large enclosure for interior pull and junction boxes larger than 12 inches in
any dimension.
(3)
Locate and install electrical boxes to allow access. Provide access panels if
required.
(4)
Locate and install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present a neat
mechanical appearance.
(5)
Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished
areas.
(6)
Provide knockout closure for unused openings.
(7)
Align wall-mounted outlet boxes plumb and level for switches, and similar
devices.
(8)
Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets above counters and
backsplashes
(9)
Install lighting outlets to locate luminaries as shown on the Drawings.
Use recessed outlet boxes in finished areas where indicated.
(1)
Secure boxes to interior wall and partition studs, accurately positioning to allow
for surface finish thickness, and plaster/tile ring installation.
(2)
Use stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and
adjustable steel channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
(3)
Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting corner only.
masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes
(4)
Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls; provide 6 inch separation, minimum.
In acoustic-rated walls provide 24 inch separation minimum.
(5)
Do not damage insulation.
Coordinate
Install wireway in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
16100 - 6
G.
(1)
Bolt wireway to wall using two-piece hangers or steel channels fastened to the
wall or on a self-supporting structure. Install level.
(2)
Mount raintight gutter in horizontal position only.
Install non metallic surface raceway in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
(1)
Use flat head screws or clips and straps suitable for the purpose, to fasten
channel to surfaces. Mount plumb and level.
(2)
Use insulated bushings and inserts at connections to outlets and corner fittings.
(3)
Use fittings and accessories designed for use with the raceway system.
H.
Install service fittings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
I.
Interface outlet boxes, service fittings, floor boxes, etc. with connection of equipment.
J.
WIRING METHODS:
K.
(1)
Concealed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
(2)
Exposed Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
(3)
Above Accessible Ceilings: Building wire in raceway.
(4)
Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
(5)
Exterior Locations: Building wire in raceway.
(6)
Underground Locations: Building wire in raceway.
Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than 14
AWG for control wiring.
(1)
Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer
than 75 feet; and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than
150 feet.
L.
Neatly train and secure wiring inside boxes, equipment and panelboards.
M.
Use UL listed wire-pulling lubricant for pulling conductors in raceways.
N.
Protect exposed cables.
O.
Support cables above accessible ceilings to keep them from resting on ceiling tiles.
P.
Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptible
temperature rise.
Q.
Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
R.
Devices shall mount flush or as indicated on the Drawings.
WIRING SYSTEMS
16100 - 7
S.
T.
3.
(1)
Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, “OFF” position down.
(2)
Install wall dimmers 48 inches above floor. De-rate ganged dimmers as instructed
by manufacturer. Do not use a common neutral, provide a separate neutral for
each dimmed circuit.
(3)
Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above counters or
splashbacks, with grounding pole on bottom. Receptacles above counters or
splashbacks shall not be mounted higher than 44” AFF to bottom of device unless
noted otherwise.
(4)
Install GFCI receptacles at all outdoor locations and all indoor locations as required
by NFPA 70, and as indicated.
(5)
Install specific purpose receptacles at heights shown on Drawings.
(6)
Install cord and attachment plug caps on equipment under the provisions of Section
16100. Size cord for connected load and rating of branch circuit over-current
protection.
Install wall plates flush and level.
(1)
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, telephone, television and blank
outlets in finished areas.
(2)
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished
areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.
(3)
Install weatherproof coverplates on all devices/boxes in wet or outdoor locations.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A.
4.
Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Perform field inspection and testing of circuits under provisions of Section 16000.
(1)
Inspect wire and cables for physical damage and proper connection.
(2)
Torque test conductor
recommended values.
(3)
Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors.
Verify proper phasing connections.
connections
and
terminations
to
manufacturer’s
PAINTING:
A.
All equipment furnished shall be rendered free from grease, dirt, etc. and should any
equipment with factory finish be scratched, the blemish shall be touched-up with the
equipment manufacturer's touch-up paint.
B.
All unprotected hangers, supports, etc. shall be painted with rust resistant primer and two
finish coats of acrylic enamel.
C.
All exposed conduit, boxes, & fittings shall be painted to match background surfaces.
WIRING SYSTEMS
16100 - 8
(1)
Exterior Paint:
a.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinccoated (galvanized) metal surfaces:
1.
Low-Luster Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer.
(a)
2.
(2)
Full-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish:
galvanized metal primer.
2 finish coats over a
(a)
Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate
recommended by the manufacturer.
(b)
First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, waterborne, acrylic
enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over exterior aluminum surfaces:
a.
Full-Gloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
1.
(3)
Primer: Rust-inhibitive, acrylic- or alkyd-based, metal primer, as
recommended by the manufacturer for use over aluminum.
Interior Paint:
a.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated
metal:
1.
Semigloss, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer.
(a)
(b)
First and Second Coats: Semigloss, acrylic-latex, interior
enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the
manufacturer.
WIRING SYSTEMS
16100 - 9
SECTION 16200 - ELECTRIC POWER AND DISTRIBUTION
I.
GENERAL
1.
INCLUDED SECTIONS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Service Entrance and Metering
Utility Requirements
Panelboards
Enclosed Switches
Fuses
Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Contactors
Starters
2.
SERVICE TYPE DESCRIPTION: Electric Service System shall be 208Y/120 volts three phase 4
wire served from an underground utility primary service and an underground secondary service
derived from a pad mounted transformer.
3.
PROJECT CONDITIONS: Verify field measurements for the equipment to ensure proper fit within
the space provided.
4.
UTILITY REQUIREMENTS:
A.
The serving utility is Gulf Power.
B.
Metering shall be provided by the contractor.
(1)
Coordinate with the utility for exact metering requirements.
(2)
Install metering equipment provided by the utility company.
(3)
Pay for all assessments, service charges, fees, etc. from the utility for service
requirements. These costs from the electrical utility for providing the electric
service shall be excluded in the Contractor’s bid.
5.
EQUIPMENT APPLICATION: All equipment and materials shall have ratings established by a
recognized independent agency or laboratory. The Contractor shall apply the items used on this
project within those ratings and application shall be subject to any stipulations or exceptions
established by the independent agency or laboratory. Use of equipment or materials in applications
beyond that certified by the agency or beyond that recommended by the manufacturer shall be
cause for removal and replacement of such mis-applied items.
II.
PRODUCTS
1.
PANELBOARDS:
A.
DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.
(1)
Bus Material: Tin-plated Copper or Aluminum.
(2)
Ground Bus: Copper.
(3)
Enclosures: Type 1 or 3R as shown on the Drawings.
(4)
Mounting: Surface or flush mount as indicated on the Drawings.
ELECTRIC POWER AND DISTRIBUTION
16200 - 1
2.
3.
(5)
Door: Hinged with lock. Door assembly shall be hinged to enclosure for panels
rated 250 amps or larger.
(6)
Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on, ratings as shown on Drawings..
B.
ACCESSORIES: Provide panel and branch device accessories as indicated on the
Drawings
C.
FUTURE PROVISIONS: Where space provisions are indicated on the Drawings, provide
bussing, bus extensions, etc. required to mount future circuit breakers. Where spare
provisions are indicated on the Drawings, provide circuit breakers complete and ready for
connection.
D.
MANUFACTURERS: Cutler Hammer, Square-D Company, General Electric, and ITESiemens
ENCLOSED SWITCHES:
A.
ENCLOSED SWITCH ASSEMBLIES: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; Fuse clips shall be
designed to accommodate Class ‘J’ or ‘R’ fuses as shown on the Drawings.
B.
ENCLOSURES: NEMA KS 1; Type 1 or 3R as required.
C.
GROUND: Provide grounding lug.
D.
RATINGS: 600 or 250 volts to match system service requirements, poles and amp ratings
as indicated on the Drawings and coordinated with other equipment installers.
E.
MANUFACTURERS: Cutler Hammer, Square-D Company, General Electric, and ITE
Siemens
FUSES:
A.
B.
C.
Service Entrance/Feeder Circuits – 601 Amp and larger.
(1)
U.L. Class L
(2)
Current Limiting
(3)
200,000 amp RMS Interrupt Rating
(4)
Voltage Rating: As required for system compatibility
Service Entrance/Feeder Circuits – 600 Amp and smaller.
(1)
U.L. Class RK1
(2)
Current Limiting
(3)
(4)
Motor, Motor Controller, Transformer and Inductive Circuits.
16200 - 2
D.
4.
5.
6.
(1)
U.L. Class RD!, Time Delay
(2)
Current Limiting
(3)
(4)
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
A.
CIRCUIT BREAKER: NEMA AB 1; Voltage and Accessories as indicated on Drawings.
B.
ENCLOSURES: Code gauge steel, NEMA 1 or 3R as required.
C.
CONTACTORS:
A.
MECHANICALLY HELD CONTACTORS: NEMA ICS 2; mechanically held, electrically
operated.
B.
ELECTRICALLY HELD CONTACTORS: NEMA ICS 2; electrically held, electrically
operated.
C.
COIL OPERATING VOLTAGE: 120 volts, 60 Hz.
D.
ENCLOSURES: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1 or 3R as required.
STARTERS:
A.
Starters furnished with the equipment of other sections shall comply with this section.
B.
Single Phase Fractional Horsepower (HP) Manual Starter: 1 or 2 pole, AC generalpurpose Class A manually operated, full-voltage controller for fractional horsepower
induction motors, with thermal overload unit, integral red pilot light, and toggle operator.
C.
For motors of 0 HP thru 15 HP, starters may be across-the-line type.
D.
For motors of 20 HP thru 30 HP, starters shall be part-winding, auto-transformer, wyedelta or other current limiting type.
E.
For motors of 35 HP and above, starters shall be auto-transformer, wye-delta, or
approved solid state soft start.
E.
This contractor shall contact the serving electric utililty for written approval on the starter
type for every motor 20 HP and above.
III.
EXECUTION
1.
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION:
16200 - 3
2.
A.
Make arrangements with utility company to obtain permanent electrical service to the
facility. Provide CT Cabinet and Meter base as required by utility for service connection.
B.
Provide concrete pad for utility transformer. Pad details on the Drawings are for
estimating purposes. Coordinate exact pad requirements with the utility prior to
installation.
B
Provide pressure treated service/metering pole of class and size indicated on the
Drawings.
INSTALLATION:
A.
Install utility services in accordance with utility company standards and requirements.
(1)
Underground Service: Install service entrance conduits and conductors from the
utility service point to the service equipment as shown on the Drawings.
(2)
Provide lugs on utility transformer spaces sized to accommodate service
entrance conductors.
B.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C.
Install panelboards to NEMA PB 1.1.
D.
Provide labels for all panelboards and distribution equipment.
F.
Provide typewritten directory inside panel door for all panelboards.
G.
Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter enclosure door identifying motor
served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and
voltage/phase rating. Provide nameplate on cover exterior to indicate motor served.
16200 - 4
SECTION 16231 - PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for emergency power supply with the
following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
1.
1.3
Gas engine.
Unit-mounted cooling system.
Unit-mounted control and monitoring.
Performance requirements for sensitive loads.
Load banks.
Outdoor enclosure.
Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and
relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter
over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the
parameter.
B.
LP: Liquid petroleum.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the
following:
1.
2.
B.
Thermal damage curve for generator.
Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR
16231 - 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other
components specified.
Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate
requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.
Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported
equipment. Include base weights.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that [day tank, ]enginegenerator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces
defined in Division 16 Section "Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints." Include the
following:
1.
Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a.
2.
3.
The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based
and their installation requirements.
D.
Qualification Data: For installer.
E.
Source quality-control test reports.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Certified summary of prototype-unit test report.
Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not
identical, to those tested on prototype unit.
Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of
compliance with specified requirements.
Report of sound generation.
Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations.
Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.
F.
Field quality-control test reports.
G.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:
1.
H.
List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access.
Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
16231 - 2
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
1.
2.
Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's
place of business to Project site.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic
restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and
engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those
indicated for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles (321 km)
of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance
repairs.
C.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to
conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing
Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
D.
Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one
source from a single manufacturer.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
F.
Comply with ASME B15.1.
G.
Comply with NFPA 37.
H.
I.
J.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 emergency power supply system.
K.
Comply with UL 2200.
L.
Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.
M.
Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for
maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set
including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other
components of installation.
16231 - 3
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
B.
Environmental Conditions:
Engine-generator system shall withstand the following
environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
performance capability:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption
of electrical service.
Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Architect's and Owner's
written permission.
Ambient Temperature: 5 to 40 deg C.
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.
Altitude: Sea level to 1000 feet (300 m).
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for package engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in
Division 3.
B.
Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations for
remote radiators. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
1.9
Warranty Period: 1 year from date of Substantial Completion.
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full
maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include
quarterly exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include
routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for
proper operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and
installation of original equipment.
16231 - 4
1.10
A.
EXTRA MATERIALS
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each.
Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each.
Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product
indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.2
Caterpillar; Engine Div.
Generac Power Systems, Inc.
Kohler Co.; Generator Division.
Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group.
ENGINE-GENERATOR SET
A.
Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.
B.
Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete
foundation; and have lifting attachments.
1.
C.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to
indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center
of gravity.
Power Output Ratings: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to operate
as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.
Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire.
Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and
address, and model and serial number of component.
Generator-Set Performance:
16231 - 5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no
load to full load.
Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent stepload increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within three seconds.
Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no
load to full load.
Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within
the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state
operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.
Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load
increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state
operating band within five seconds.
Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral
shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence
factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.
Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not
less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator
system components.
Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by
nonlinear load.
a.
10.
2.3
Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator.
Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.
ENGINE
A.
Fuel: Natural gas.
B.
Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.
C.
Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm (11.4 m/s).
D.
Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller
while passing full flow.
Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil
temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable
container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or
appliances.
Engine Fuel System:
1.
Dual Natural Gas with LP-Gas Backup (Vapor-Withdrawal) System:
a.
Carburetor.
16231 - 6
b.
c.
d.
Secondary Gas Regulators: One for each fuel type.
Fuel-Shutoff Solenoid Valves: One for each fuel source.
Flexible Fuel Connectors: One for each fuel source.
F.
Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system.
Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.
G.
Governor: Mechanical.
H.
Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on enginegenerator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,
with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start
to 110 percent load condition.
Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum
closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.
Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer
covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.
a.
b.
I.
Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with remote radiator and integral engine-driven
coolant pump.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
J.
Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F
(82 deg C), and noncollapsible under vacuum.
End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and
equipment connections.
Configuration: Vertical air discharge.
Radiator Core Tubes: Aluminum
Retain one of first two subparagraphs below. Retain second if containment of coolant
expansion by radiator is marginal or inadequate. Coordinate with Drawings.
Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start
to 110 percent load condition.
Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum
closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.
Fan: Driven by multiple belts from engine shaft
Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water,
with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.
Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow
automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by
engine manufacturer.
Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected
with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure
requirements.
16231 - 7
1.
2.
Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz.
Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from exhaust discharge after
installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less.
K.
Air-Intake Filter: Standard-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element
and "blocked filter" indicator.
L.
Starting System: 12 V electric, with negative ground.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with
ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.
Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified.
Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project
Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least twice without recharging.
Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated.
Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.
Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal
insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above
10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1
"Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries
in place.
Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage
regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.
Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit
shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.4
Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after
battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery
terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging
mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.
Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for
variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C to plus 60 deg C to prevent
overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.
Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of
input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.
Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging
rates.
Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts
providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense
high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either
condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication
at system control and monitoring panel.
Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.
CONTROL AND MONITORING
A.
Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control
and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more
16231 - 8
separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When modeselector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same
switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or
equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms.
Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.
B.
Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted control and monitoring panel.
1.
C.
Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with
NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and
temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.
Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level [1] [2]
system, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AC voltmeter.
AC ammeter.
AC frequency meter.
DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging).
Engine-coolant temperature gage.
Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage.
Running-time meter.
Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es).
Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.
D.
Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include
wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine
or generator, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block, factory wired to Form C dry contacts, for
each alarm and status indication is reserved for connections for data-link transmission of
indications to remote data terminals. Data system connections to terminals are covered in
Division 16 Section "Electrical Power Monitoring and Control."
F.
Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm
conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each
alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual
indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will
reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flushmounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.
2.5
GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION
A.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying
with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.
1.
2.
Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection.
Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating.
16231 - 9
3.
4.
B.
Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying
with UL 489.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Rating: Matched to generator output rating.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip switch when signaled by generator protector or by other
protective devices.
Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in
each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when
thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other
generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall
open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform the
following functions:
1.
E.
Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous.
Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other
protective devices.
Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.
Generator Disconnect Switch: Molded-case type, 100 percent rated.
1.
2.
D.
Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other
protective devices.
Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.
Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload
equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is
integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.
Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated
full-load current for up to 10 seconds.
As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of
the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect
device, and shuts down the generator set.
Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated
voltage to avoid overshoot.
Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70, "Emergency System" signals for groundfault. Integrate ground-fault alarm indication with other generator-set alarm indications.
GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A.
Comply with NEMA MG 1.
B.
Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated
integrally with generator rotor.
C.
Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
16231 - 10
D.
Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other
voltages if required.
E.
Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,
overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated
capacity.
F.
Enclosure: Dripproof.
G.
Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
H.
Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1.
I.
2.7
Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent
adjustment of output-voltage operating band.
Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew
point.
OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE
A.
Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof steel housing, wind resistant up to 140 mph.
Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring
maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control
shall be mounted within enclosure.
1.
Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads.
2.
Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation.
3.
Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when
engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.
4.
Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions.
5.
Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air
circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents.
6.
Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in
coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating
limits required by engine-generator-set components.
7.
Muffler Location: Within enclosure.
B.
Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components
within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient
temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.
1.
2.
C.
Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable
louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.
Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed
to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.
Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.
16231 - 11
2.8
MOTORS
A.
General requirements for motors are specified in Division 15 Section "Motors."
1.
2.
2.9
Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load
will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are
specified in Division 16 Sections.
FINISHES
A.
2.10
A.
Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over
corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of
identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.
1.
B.
Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.
Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other
system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at
rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to
those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.
Full load run.
Maximum power.
Voltage regulation.
Transient and steady-state governing.
Single-step load pickup.
Safety shutdown.
Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by
Owner's representative.
Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator
performance.
B.
Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of
connections before packaged engine-generator installation.
16231 - 12
C.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment
instructions and with NFPA 110.
B.
Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or
accessories, for periodic maintenance.
C.
Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection
of 1 inch (25 mm) on 4-inch- (100-mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts
installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 16 Section
"Electrical Supports and Seismic Restraints."
D.
Install remote radiator with elastomeric isolator pads having a minimum deflection of 1 inch (25
mm) on concrete base on grade..
E.
Install Schedule 40, black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install
thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Flexible connectors and steel
piping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section "Hydronic
Piping."
1.
F.
3.3
Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a
shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40, black steel pipe with
welded joints.
Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not
specified to be factory mounted.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Sections.
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
B.
Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator
to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect cooling-system water piping to engine-generator set and remote radiator with flexible
connectors.
D.
Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.
E.
Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.
1.
2.
Drawings indicate
Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems
outside the building are specified in Division 2 Section "Fuel Oil Distribution."
Diesel fuel piping, valves, and specialties inside the building are specified in Division 15
Section "Fuel Oil Piping."
16231 - 13
3.
4.
Natural- and LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas distribution outside the
building are specified in Division 2 Section "Natural Gas Distribution."
Natural- and LP-gas piping, valves, and specialties for gas piping inside the building are
specified in Division 15 Section "Fuel Gas Piping."
F.
Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding."
G.
Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Identify system components according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" and
Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare
test reports.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
Report results in writing.
C.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and
mechanical inspection except those indicated to be optional) for "AC Generators and for
Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to
those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.
Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Record individual cell voltages.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for
full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific
gravity under both conditions.
Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a
capacity load test for the battery.
Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge.
Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
16231 - 14
4.
5.
Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and floatcharging conditions.
System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity
of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check
for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.
E.
Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.
F.
Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of
NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records
available for examination on request.
G.
Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no
leaks exist.
H.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper
motor rotation and unit operation.
I.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
equipment.
J.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
K.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
L.
Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to
each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
M.
Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus
connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to
portable scanner.
1.
2.
3.
3.6
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months
after date of Substantial Completion.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and
connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies
detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 1 Section
"Demonstration and Training."
16231 - 15
SECTION 16289 – TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
I.
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall furnish and install the Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)
equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications as specified herein
and as shown on the contract drawings. Refer to related sections for surge requirements in:
a) Section 16200 -- Panelboards
1.03 REFERENCES.
The TVSS units and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance
nd
with the latest applicable UL Listed standards (UL 1449, 2 Edition), UL 1283 and CSA certified
per CSA 22.2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
1. Provide verification that the TVSS device complies with the required UL 1449 2
and CSA approvals.
nd
Edition
2. Provide actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results for the
ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C3 & C1 (combination wave) and B3 (ringwave) tested in
accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
3. Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures
between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device's noise attenuation exceeds 41 dB at
100 kHz.
4. Provide test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying the
suppressor components can survive published surge current rating on both a per mode
and per phase basis using the IEEE C62.41, 8 x 20 microsecond current wave. Note
that test data on individual module is not accepted.
B.
Submit five (5) copies of the above information.
1.05 SUBMITTALS – FOR INFORMATION:
When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted to
the engineer:
a) UL 1449 Listing classifications, and clamping voltage rating for
protection.
b) ANSI/IEEE C62.41 AND C62.45 Category C3 clamping voltage.
c) Sequential surge survivability per ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
d) Dimensions and weight
e) Recommended connection wiring diagram
each mode of
1.06 QUALIFICATIONS
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION
16289 - 1
A. Manufacturer must have a minimum of five years (in U.S.)
systems.
experience in producing TVSS
B. TVSS devices and accessories shall be obtained through one manufacturer.
C. Other manufacturers not listed in this document may be considered by the engineer/architect
at least 14 days prior to bid. The specifications of the product listed in 1.05 “SUBMITTALSFOR INFORMATION” shall be highlighted.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One
(1) copy of these Shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.
1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Five (5) copies of the equipment operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided.
B. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following information:
1. Instruction books and/or leaflets
2. Recommended renewal parts list
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS:
A. Furnish replaceable protection modules for service entrance unit with labeled protective
covering for storage.
II. PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Cutler-Hammer, Square D, Advanced Protection Technologies (APT), Surge Suppression Inc.
2.02 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL
A. Electrical Requirements
1. Unit Operating Voltage -- Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit
configuration.
2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) -- The MCOV shall be greater than
115% of the nominal system operating voltage.
3. Protection Modes -- For a wye configured system, the device must have directly
connected suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and
neutral-ground (N-G). For a delta configured system, the device must have
suppression elements between line to line (L-L) and line to ground (L-G).
nd
nd
4. UL 1449 2 Edition SVR -- The maximum UL 1449 2
must not exceed the following:
Modes
208Y/120
480Y/277
Edition SVR for the device
600Y/347
16289 - 2
L-N; L-G; N-G
500 V
900 V
1000 V
L-L
900 V
1500 V
1800 V
________________________________________________________________
5. ANSI/IEEE Cat C3 Let Through Voltage -- The let through voltage based on IEEE
C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3 surges (20 kV, 10 kA)
shall be less than:
Modes
208Y/120
480Y/277
600Y/347
L-N
910 V
1070 V
1300 V
6. ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 Let Through Voltage -- Let through voltage based on IEEE C62.41
and C62.45 recommended procedures for the ANSI/IEEE Cat. B3 ringwave (6 kV, 5000
amps) shall be less than:
Modes
208Y/120
480Y/277
600Y/347
L-N
375 V
510 V
300 V
____________________________________________________________________________________
B. TVSS Design
1. Balanced Suppression Platform -- The surge current shall be equally distributed to all
MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge
suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV.
Designs incorporating TVSS modules shall not be acceptable.
2. Electrical Noise Filter -- Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise
rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 41 dB at 100 kHz using
the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. The unit shall be complimentary listed
to UL 1283. Products not able to demonstrate noise attenuation of 41 dB @ 100 kHz
shall be rejected.
3. Internal Connections -- No plug-in component modules shall be used as surge current
conductors. All internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing low
impedance conductors and compression fittings.
4. Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring -- Each unit shall be equipped with 200 kAIC internal
fuses. Each unit shall provide the following three levels of monitoring:
a) Continuous monitoring of fusing system
b) Thermal detection circuit shall monitor for overheating in all modes due to thermal
runaway.
c) A green/red solid state indicator light shall be provided on each phase. The
absence of a green light and the presence of a red light, shall indicate which
phase(s) have been damaged. Fault detection will activate a flashing trouble light.
16289 - 3
Units which can not detect open-circuit damage, thermal conditions and over
current will not be accepted.
5. Warranty -- The manufacturer shall provide a full ten (10) year warranty from the date
of shipment against any TVSS part failure when installed in compliance with
manufacturer's written instructions and any applicable national or local electric code.
2.03 SYSTEM APPLICATION
A.
The TVSS applications covered under this section include distribution and branch panel
locations, bus plugs, motor control centers (MCC), switchgear, and switchboard assemblies.
B.
Surge Current Capacity -- The minimum total surge current 8 x 20 microsecond waveform
that the device is capable of withstanding shall be as shown in the following table:
Application
Min. Surge Current (per mode)
Service Entrance (Switchboards
Switchgear, MCC Main Entrance)
120 kA
Distribution Panelboards
80 kA
High Exposure Roof Top Locations
80 kA
Branch Locations (Panelboards,
MCC's, Busway)
40 kA
2.04 Accessories
A.
Push to test feature to verify operational integrity.
B.
Form C dry contacts one NO, one NC for remote status monitoring.
2.05 Enclosures
A.
All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise
noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings and as
described below:
1. NEMA 1 surface or flush-mounted general purpose enclosures primarily intended for indoor
use
2. NEMA 12 dust-tight enclosures intended for indoor use primarily to provide protection against
circulating dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids (Panelboards Only)
3. NEMA 3R rainproof enclosures intended for outdoor use primarily to provide protection against
rain, sleet and damage from external ice formation
4. NEMA 4 watertight stainless steel intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide
protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing rain, hose-directed water, and
damage from external ice formation. (Side Mounted Units Only)
III. EXECUTION
3.01 Examination
3.02 Factory testing
16289 - 4
A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment under this section. All tests shall
be in accordance with the latest version of NEMA and UL standards.
3.03 Installation
A. The Contractors shall install all equipment per the manufacturer's recommendations and the
contract drawings.
B. Surge protection devices shall be installed and connected before the service entrance is
connected or energized.
C. Existing utilities shall not be interrupted without written permission from project’s architect.
16289 - 5
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING
I.
GENERAL
1.
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
2.
Section 16000 – Electrical General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this
Section, with additions and modifications specified herein.
INCLUDED SECTIONS:
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Luminaires
Lamps
Shielding Media
Ballasts
Exit Signs
Emergency Lighting Units
Poles and Brackets
Photocells
Lighting Contactors
Time Switches
3.
LIGHTING MANUFACTURERS: The drawings indicate the lighting fixture descriptions and
catalog numbers. Equal manufacturers are also given. Manufacturers not listed as equals shall
be submitted to the engineer at least 10 days prior to bid.
II.
PRODUCTS
1.
LUMINAIRES:
A.
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE:
(1)
B.
C.
LIGHTING
Product requirements for each luminaire are specified in luminaire schedule on
Drawings.
ACCESSORIES: Provide required accessories for mounting and operation of each
luminaire as indicated.
(1)
Recessed Luminaires: Provide trim type suitable for ceiling system in which
luminaire is installed.
(2)
Thermal Protection: Provide thermal protection devices to meet NFPA 70
requirements.
(3)
Surface Luminaires: Provide spacers and brackets required for mounting.
(4)
Pendant Luminaires: Provide swivel hangers, pendant rods, tubes, and chains as
indicated to install luminaire at appropriate height.
LAY-IN TROFFERS:
(1)
Door Frame: Aluminum .050”, extruded with mitered corners. Latches to be fully
enclosed, spring loaded, cam type. Door frame shall be fully gasketed.
(2)
Housing: Cold rolled steel, (20) (22) gauge minimum with smooth effect mitered
corners.
16500 - 1
(3)
2.
LAMPS:
A.
3.
DESCRIPTION:
(1)
Incandescent Lamps: 130 volts, inside frosted, shape as scheduled.
lamps frosted or clear as scheduled.
Halogen
(2)
Fluorescent Lamps: Type, size and wattage as scheduled; temperature of 4100° K;
and CRI ≥ 75.
(3)
Metal Halide HID Lamps: Phosphor coated or clear per luminaire manufacturer’s
recommendation. Suitable for ballast furnished in luminare for all burning positions.
(5)
High Pressure Sodium HID Lamps: Clear or coated per luminare manufacturer’s
recommendation. Suitable for ballast furnished in luminare for all burning positions.
(6)
Reflector Lamp Beam Patterns: Conform to ANSI C78.379.
SHIELDING MEDIA:
A.
B.
4.
Finish: Painted after fabrication with 90% reflective glossy white thermosetting
powder coat.
PRISMATIC LENS FOR FLUORESCENT TROFFERS:
(1)
Material: Clear virgin acrylic.
(2)
Type: Prismatic cones, pattern 12 straight flat prisms.
(3)
Thickness: 0.156” minimum.
PRISMATIC LENS FOR FLUORESCENT WRAP AROUND FIXTURES:
(1)
Material: Clear virgin acrylic.
(2)
Type: Sides-linear prisms, bottom-pyramidal prisms. Diffuser shall have welded
ends forming a 5-sided basket.
(3)
Hinging: Either side.
BALLASTS:
A.
LIGHTING
FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: Provide electronic fluorescent ballasts suitable for use under
installation conditions listed for each luminare.
(1)
Ballasts shall meet the requirements of the General Communications Commission
Rule and Regulations, Part 18, Class A.
(2)
Ballasts shall not contain Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCB’s).
(3)
Ballasts shall have a power factor of 95% minimum.
(4)
Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, and sound rated “A”.
16500 - 2
B.
C.
5.
(5)
Ballasts shall have a frequency of operation of 20 kHz or greater, and operate
without visible flicker.
(6)
Where applicable, ballasts shall meet minimum efficiency standards of Public Law
No. 100-357, National Appliance Energy Conservation Amendments of 1988.
(7)
Ballasts case temperature shall not exceed 25°C temperature rise over 40°C
ambient. Ballasts cast temperature must not exceed 85°C.
(8)
Ballasts shall withstand line transient as defined in ANSI/IEEE C 62.41, Category A.
(9)
Input third harmonic current content shall not exceed 10%.
(10)
Ballasts shall be manufactured by Advance, Magnetek or Motorola.
COMPACT FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: Provide solid state electronic ballasts suitable for
use under installation conditions listed for each luminare.
(1)
Ballasts shall be high power factor.
(2)
Ballasts shall meet the requirements of the General Communications Commission
Rule and Regulations, Part 18, Class A.
(3)
Ballasts shall have a power factor of 95% minimum.
(4)
Ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, and sound rated “A”.
(5)
Ballasts shall have a frequency of operation of 20 kHz or greater, and operate
without visible flicker.
(6)
Ballasts case temperature shall not exceed 25°C temperature rise over 40°C
ambient. Ballasts cast temperature must not exceed 85°C.
(7)
Ballasts shall withstand line transient as defined in ANSI/IEEE C 62.41, Category A.
(8)
Input third harmonic current content shall not exceed 10%.
HID BALLASTS: Provide HID ballast suitable for use under installation conditions and type
of each luminare.
(1)
Voltage: As scheduled.
(2)
Power Factor: High power factor.
(3)
Description: ANSI C82.4.
(4)
Integral Equipment: Ballast to be mounted internally of the luminare.
EXIT SIGNS:
A.
LIGHTING
DESCRIPTION: Exit sign fixture.
(1)
Lamps: Manufacturer’s standard.
(2)
Voltage: 120/277 volt as scheduled.
16500 - 3
B.
C.
6.
CONSTRUCTION:
(1)
Face: Stencil face with red letters.
(2)
Directional Arrows: Universal for field adjustment.
(3)
Mounting: Universal for field selection.
(4)
Exterior: Shall have a mechanical (bolts or screws) connection between the fixture
housing and the canopy/base.
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY: Integral, listed for emergency lighting use.
(1)
Battery: Lead calcium type.
(2)
Battery Charger: Dual-rate type.
(3)
Indicators and Controls: AC ON; test switch.
INCANDESCENT EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS:
A.
DESCRIPTION: Self-contained emergency lighting unit.
(1)
Input Voltage: 120/277 volts as scheduled.
(2)
Battery: Lead calcium type.
(3)
Battery Charger: Dual-rate type.
(4)
Lamps: Sealed beam PAR, DC type.
B.
INDICATORS AND CONTROLS: AC ON; recharging, test switch.
C.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION: Conduit connection.
8.
LIGHTING STANDARDS OF EXTERIOR FIXTURES: Shall not have ferrous metal exposed parts
and screws shall be stainless steel. All optical systems shall be gasketed to prevent entry
of moisture and insects.
9.
PHOTOCELL SWITCH:
A.
MANUFACTURERS: Tork, Precision, and Paragon
B.
DESCRIPTION: Photocell switch manufactured to NEMA ICS 2.
C.
RATINGS:
D.
10.
(1)
CONTACT RATINGS: 1800 VA at 120/277 volts.
(2)
SENSITIVITY: Field adjustable from 3 to 10 foot-candles.
ENCLOSURE: Gasketed, cast aluminum or feralloy box with conduit hub.
CONTACTORS:
A.
LIGHTING
MANUFACTUERS: Square-D Company, General Electric Company, and ITE-Siemens
16500 - 4
B.
11.
LIGHTING CONTACTORS: NEMA ICS 2; mechanical held, electrically operated.
(1)
Coil Operating Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz.
(2)
Enclosures: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1, general purpose.
(3)
Multi-pole, 20 amp rating, number of poles as indicated on the Drawings.
TIME SWITCH:
A.
MANUFACTURERS: Tork, Precision, and Paragon
B.
DESCRIPTION: Clock timer manufactured to NEMA ICS 2, with astronomical dial, 12-hour
spring wound carry over, and day skipping feature.
C.
RATINGS:
(1)
Contact Ratings: 40 ampere per pole, number of poles as indicated on Drawings.
(2)
Coil Voltage: 120 volts, 60 Hz.
(3)
Dial Timer: Seven (7) day.
(4)
Enclosure: NEMA 1 or 3R as required.
III.
EXECUTION
1.
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION: Examine adjacent surfaces to determine that surfaces are
ready to receive work.
2.
INSTALLATION:
A.
3.
Install luminaires and accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
(1)
Provide pendant accessory to mount suspended luminaires at height indicated.
Use swivel hangers on sloped ceilings.
(2)
Support surface mounted luminaires from ceiling structure; provide auxiliary
support across ceiling structure support. Fasten to prohibit movement.
(3)
Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. Install luminaires so
that there is no light leakage around fixture trim. Provide four (4) cable supports
and four (4) t-clips for each lay-in fixture and install in accordance with Article
410-16 C of the National Electrical Code.
(4)
Install lamps in luminaires and lampholders.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A.
Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work.
B.
Aim adjustable luminaires and lampholders as indicated or as directed.
C.
Adjust directional arrows on exit signs to meet approval of authority having jurisdiction.
LIGHTING
16500 - 5
D.
Clean paint splatters, dirt and debris from installed luminaires.
E.
Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work.
F.
Touch up luminaire and pole finish at completion of work.
G.
Adjust relays, timers, photo controls, etc. to achieve specified or directed operation.
LIGHTING
16500 - 6

bidder`s manual - Lord and Son Construction

Transcription

Similar documents

The Mission of the Okaloosa County Sheriff`s Office: “Ensuring fair

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

FL7891-R3 Florida Product Approval for International Beams I

Coffing EC3 Manual

Pegasus final w industries

Pegasus Summary offset copy

Fund Deal Sheet - Prairie Capital

Pay Application #4 - the Public Building Commission of Chicago